You are on page 1of 288

ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide

Version 4.0
Errata
About the Map Data Directories Tab
The following paragraph should be added to the end of the third paragraph of this
topic on page 2-9.
On this tab, you can also choose to delete any existing sets of line or building
vectors. If this is done, ENTERPRISE will import all of the vectors that are
referenced in the index file in the directory that you have specified.
About the User Data Directories Tab
The following paragraph should be added to the end of the last paragraph of this
topic on page 2-9.
On this tab, you can also choose to delete any existing sets of user vectors (if you
have the correct permissions). If this is done, ENTERPRISE will import all of the
vectors that are referenced in the index file in the directory that you have specified.
About the 3g Folders Tab
This following text replaces that shown on page 2-11.
If you have 3g installed, the Modify Project dialog box will contain a 3g Folders tab.
On this tab, you set up the folders that will be used for storing distributed
simulations. These make use of extra processing power by enabling you to perform
Monte Carlo simulation snapshots on a collection of networked PCs then merge the
results. For this to work, one computer will be running Enterprise and will control
all the other computers. This computer is called the Server. Multiple other
computers will be either running Enterprise, or running the 3g Simulator Client
Software. These computers are called Clients.
The Client computers process *.3gr files. They are loaded from the central location,
visible to all the Clients, snapshots are run on the files, then they are saved back to
their original locations. The Server is used to set up what Client computers are to be
used, and what files are to be run.
To enter a folder for distribution:
1. In the Modify Project dialog box, on the 3g Folders tab, specify a Distribution
Folder. This folder is where Enterprise will store all *.3gr files used for
distribution. The Distribution Clients also will pick up their files from this
location, so the folder needs to be accessible to all computers participating in
Distribution. For example, \\server\share\3g Distribution Folder.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
2. For each database user who is permitted to use Distribution, create a
subfolder under the Distribution Folder, with the same name as the database
user. For example, if the database user is demouser, a folder must be created
under the Distribution Folder called demouser For example,
\\server\share\3g Distribution Folder\demouser.
Note : If you do not have permission to use Distribution, see your
administrator.
Setting Network Preferences
On page 2-14, the preferred method for creating links table should be replaced by
the following table:
Select If You Want ENTERPRISE
Don't Auto-Create Network
Connections
Not to make any visible physical connections when you add a new network
element. (Although in the Site Database, you will see some sort of physical
connections if you are displaying by physical links.)
Auto-Create For Current Network
Type
To make a physical connection automatically between a newly BSC and the
nearest MSC, or between a newly added site and the nearest BSC or
distribution node, depending on what you have selected in the in BTS
parenting pane.
To see these changes, ensure you select to view All Filters in the Map View
window Data Types list:
Auto-Create For All Network Types To make physical connections automatically as described above, but just not
take into consideration the network type at all.
About the Equipment Windows
Page 3-5 and 3-6 incorrectly state that for antenna and microwave antenna mask
angles, only degrees or half degrees are acceptable. In fact, you can enter mask
angles up to a 0.01 degree accuracy.
About the Height Profile Window
Page 4-34 incorrectly states that the second button enables you to display the path
between a Property and a desired site. In fact, it enables you to display the path
between a Property and a desired point.
Displaying a Path
The type of profile previously known as site to site is now called Property to
Property. Accordingly, the topic on page 4-35 should read:
To display a path between a Property and a desired point, two Properties, or two
desired points:
1. From the View menu, click Height Profile.
2. In the Height Profile window, click the appropriate button, for example,
Property to point.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
3. In the Map View window, click the Property (or point) then move the cursor
to the desired point (or Property) and click again.
4. If appropriate, the start and finish heights are set by the antenna heights of
the selected Property and the global height setting for the mobile antenna
(normally 1.5m).
5. If you have selected Property to Property or Property to point mode, you can
select which antenna from the Property is used. To do this, in the Map View
window, click with the right mouse button on the Property and then double
click the required antenna.
6. To display clutter, in the Height Profiler, click the Settings tab, and select the
clutter options that you require. You can select to use Clutter Heights,
Building Raster Heights, Building Vector Heights, or a combination of these.
Note : The appearance of these tabs changes depending on the ENTERPRISE
products that you have installed.
Changing the Height Profile Settings
This topic on page 4-39 is incorrect, and should be replaced by the following.
To change what the Height Profile displays, click the Settings tab.
This picture shows the ENTERPRISE core Height Profile Settings tab.
Height Profile Settings tab
Note : Any changes that you make to the values in the Height Profile window will
not be applied to the Site Database.
In the Properties pane of the Settings tab, you can:
Select the start and finish antenna heights for point to point mode. For
Property to point and Property to Property modes, this is dictated by the
height of the BS (Base Station) antenna and the MS (Mobile Station) antenna.
Edit the transmitter frequency at the start and end points.
In the Map Data pane of the Settings tab, you can:
Select which map data (if any) you want to include in the height profile
calculation Clutter Heights, Building Raster Heights and/or Building
Vector Heights
Select the resolution to be used in the height profile calculation
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Using GPS
The following table replaces the one on page 5-9.
4. In a Map View window, display a map that includes your position and then:
To Do This
View your current location From the Data Types list in the Map View window, select the GPS
Interface option and click on the 2D Map View. The position is
automatically shown as a crosshair on the map.
Move a site to the current position Click the Move button and move to any location in the box surrounding
the crosshair.
Add a new site (or distribution node
and so on)
Click the Add Site button and place the new site near the crosshair at
the current position.
When the Map Backdrop Does Not Appear in the Map View
Window
This section on page A-6 should read as follows.
ENTERPRISE determines whether the map backdrop is worth displaying by
checking that the image is not reduced too mach using an algorithm that says if the
visible width of the image is less than a third of the 2D view display, then do not
display the backdrop.
Otherwise a frame indicating the map backdrops area is displayed on the map.
Total Interference Array Section
This table has been added to page A-24. The table shows the total interference array
data:
Field Name Data Type Length
(bytes)
Description
CI LEVEL SHORT 2 Total Intereference
CONNECTION SHORT 2 Unused
Predictions
This section on page A-26 should read as follows:
The prediction file refers to the isotropic path loss masked with the corresponding
antenna pattern for an individual transmitting antenna on a cell.
The filenames for prediction files are constructed from the project number, various
record keys in the ENTERPRISE database and the resolution of the prediction in
metres. The filename convention for a prediction file is:
<projectno>.<objectkey>.<modelkey>.<userkey>.<resolution>
Note : The object key can be a type of antennakey or a repeaterkey depending on the
prediction. For example, if the prediction is on the repeater then the object key will
be the repeaterkey.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
The index of all the predictions are stored in the database table PREDINDEX. For
more information on this, see the Database Reference Guide.
The binary prediction file is split into two sections the Header and Path Loss.
Prediction Header Section
A note should be added to the table describing the prediction header file on page
A-27 as follows:
Type Description
Int Cell Data Version Number (2)
Int Ground Height (m)
Int Number of antennas
Note : This value is only present for 2g file. It is not present in the 3g format since there is
always a one to one mapping between antennas and models in 3g.
The Model Data table for predictions, on page A-28 has been updated to include the
following line (shown here in bold):
Type Description
Int Model Data Version Number (2)
Int Model key
Boolean (stored as one byte) Use Clutter Heights
Boolean (stored as one byte) Use Mobile Heights
2 x byte Null Padding
41 x float 41 model parameters (for example, k1, k2, and so on.)
Float frequency (MHz)
Float Earth Radius
Float Mobile Height
6 x int 6 additional model parameters
Array of 256 floats Clutter Offsets
Array of 256 floats Clutter Heights
Array of 256 floats Mobile Heights
Array of 256 floats Clutter Separations

ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Copyright 2002 AIRCOM International Ltd
All rights reserved
3g, AIRCOM, ARCHITECT, ASSET, CONNECT, DATASAFE, ENTERPRISE, NEPTUNE,
HOMEZONE, OPTIMA and TARGET are recognised trademarks of AIRCOM International.
Other product names are trademarks of their respective companies.
This documentation is protected by copyright and contains proprietary and confidential
information. No part of the contents of this documentation may be disclosed, used or
reproduced in any form, or by any means, without the prior written consent of AIRCOM
International.
Although AIRCOM International has collated this documentation to reflect the features and
capabilities supported in the software products, the company makes no warranty or
representation, either express or implied, about this documentation, its quality or fitness for a
particular customer purpose. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of ENTERPRISE
software and the application of the results obtained.
An electronic version of this document exists on our website.
This manual prepared by: AIRCOM International
Grosvenor House
65-71 London Road
Redhill, Surrey RH1 1LQ
ENGLAND
Telephone: +44 (0) 1737 775700
Support Hotline:+44 (0) 1737 775777
Fax: +44 (0) 1737 775770
Web: http://www.aircom.co.uk
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide Contents i
Version 4.0
Contents
1 Introduction
About the Products in the ENTERPRISE Suite................................................... 1-1
About This Manual .............................................................................................. 1-2
For More Information........................................................................................... 1-2
Obtaining Help................................................................................................ 1-2
Obtaining Support .......................................................................................... 1-3
Obtaining Further Services ............................................................................ 1-3
Printing Your Own Copy of ENTERPRISE Manuals...................................... 1-3
2 Setting Up a Project
Overview of Setting Up a Project ........................................................................ 2-1
Logging into a Database ..................................................................................... 2-1
Opening an Existing Project ................................................................................ 2-2
Modifying an Existing Project .............................................................................. 2-3
Creating a New Project ....................................................................................... 2-3
Override Database Directory Settings ........................................................... 2-4
About the Coord System Tab......................................................................... 2-5
About Map Projections................................................................................... 2-6
About the Map Data Directories Tab.............................................................. 2-9
About the User Data Directories Tab............................................................. 2-9
About the Map Data Extents Tab................................................................. 2-10
About the Region Load Tab......................................................................... 2-10
About the Info Tab........................................................................................ 2-10
About the Optima Login Tab........................................................................ 2-10
About the TARGET and ARCHITECT Tabs ................................................ 2-11
About the 3g Folders Tab............................................................................. 2-11
Loading a Subset of Project Data...................................................................... 2-11
Setting Up Your Preferences............................................................................. 2-12
Setting General Preferences........................................................................ 2-13
Setting Distance Preferences....................................................................... 2-14
Setting Earth Radius Preferences................................................................ 2-14
Setting Network Preferences ....................................................................... 2-14
Setting Diffraction Preferences .................................................................... 2-15
Setting Candidate Options Preferences....................................................... 2-15
Entering the Necessary Data for Calculations .................................................. 2-17
Synchronising Projects...................................................................................... 2-18
Exporting Data from a Project Using the Synchronisation Utility................. 2-19
Copying the Exported Data to a New Project .............................................. 2-20
Updating the Transfer File............................................................................ 2-21
Updating the Master Database with Remote Changes................................ 2-21
3 About the ENTERPRISE User Interface
About the User Interface ..................................................................................... 3-1
About the Main Menu .......................................................................................... 3-1
About the Main Toolbar Buttons.......................................................................... 3-2
About the Preferences Dialog Box ...................................................................... 3-2
Contents ii ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About the ENTERPRISE Windows...................................................................... 3-3
About the Equipment Windows............................................................................3-4
About the Antennas Window.......................................................................... 3-4
About the MW Antennas Window................................................................... 3-5
About the Feeders Window............................................................................ 3-6
About the Cell Equipment Window.................................................................3-7
About the BTS Window...................................................................................3-8
About the Site Database Window........................................................................ 3-9
About the Buttons on the Site Database Window ........................................ 3-10
About the Site Database Settings Dialog Box .............................................. 3-11
Setting A Default Network ............................................................................3-12
Opening the Site Database at a Particular Site............................................ 3-12
Displaying Only Some Sites in the Site Database Window.......................... 3-12
About the Context Sensitive Menus in the Site Database Window.............. 3-13
About the ENTERPRISE Map View Window..................................................... 3-15
About the Map View Toolbar ........................................................................ 3-17
About the ENTERPRISE Map Information Window..................................... 3-18
About the 3D Map View Window....................................................................... 3-19
About the 3D Map View Window Toolbar..................................................... 3-20
About the Message Log Window....................................................................... 3-20
About the Licence Manager Window................................................................. 3-21
Troubleshooting Licence Monitoring............................................................. 3-21
About the Wastebasket......................................................................................3-22
Restoring Deleted Items ...............................................................................3-23
Deleting Items from the Wastebasket........................................................... 3-23
4 Viewing and Editing Data
About the Map View Window............................................................................... 4-1
Adding and Editing Objects in the Map View Window......................................... 4-2
Adding Properties ........................................................................................... 4-2
About Logical Networks.................................................................................. 4-2
Creating A Logical Network ............................................................................4-3
Adding Logical Nodes To The Map View Window ......................................... 4-3
Adding MSCs and BSCs................................................................................. 4-3
Adding Sites.................................................................................................... 4-4
Adding Distribution Nodes .............................................................................. 4-5
Deleting and Moving Objects..........................................................................4-5
Making Network Connections.........................................................................4-6
Breaking Network Connections ...................................................................... 4-7
Adding A Logical Connection ......................................................................... 4-8
Displaying a Search Area around a Property................................................. 4-8
About Displaying Data on the Map ...................................................................... 4-9
About the Different Data Types ...................................................................... 4-9
Changing Clutter Resolution......................................................................... 4-10
Viewing Data Types on the Map................................................................... 4-10
Changing How Items Are Displayed on the Map.......................................... 4-12
Changing How Network Elements are Displayed.........................................4-12
Changing How Vectors and Polygons are Displayed...................................4-14
Changing How Cell Info is Displayed ...........................................................4-15
Displaying Coverage for Specific Carriers.................................................... 4-17
Controlling the Display.......................................................................................4-18
Selecting Items on the Map.......................................................................... 4-18
Ordering the Data Shown on the Map..........................................................4-18
Zooming In and Out on the Map...................................................................4-20
Repositioning the Map.................................................................................. 4-20
Redrawing the Map....................................................................................... 4-20
Displaying Line of Sight Visibility.................................................................. 4-21
Saving a Map View....................................................................................... 4-24
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide Contents iii
Version 4.0
Searching the Map ............................................................................................ 4-25
Examples of Searching by Regular Expression........................................... 4-25
Printing Maps..................................................................................................... 4-26
About The Map Information Window................................................................. 4-28
Changing What the Map Information Window Displays............................... 4-28
Using the Map Information Window Detached and Attached ...................... 4-28
Viewing Information in the 3D Map View Window............................................. 4-29
Changing the Displayed Data in the 3D Map View...................................... 4-30
Viewing Solid and Wireframe Maps in the 3D Map View Window............... 4-30
Setting the Display Properties in the 3D Map View Window ....................... 4-31
About the Height Profile Window....................................................................... 4-32
Displaying a Path ......................................................................................... 4-34
Changing the Height Profile Settings ........................................................... 4-35
Changing the Clutter Settings ...................................................................... 4-36
About The Logical Connection Viewer .............................................................. 4-36
About The Traffic Tab In The Logical Connection Viewer ........................... 4-37
About The Routes Tab In The Logical Connection Viewer.......................... 4-39
About the Master View...................................................................................... 4-40
5 Working with Data
Overview of Working with Data ........................................................................... 5-1
Using Site Templates .......................................................................................... 5-1
Creating a Site Template ............................................................................... 5-2
Adding Cells and Cell Layers to Site Templates............................................ 5-3
Deleting a Site Template................................................................................ 5-3
Using Nominal and Candidate Properties........................................................... 5-3
Adding Nominals and Candidates.................................................................. 5-4
Displaying Candidates and Nominals on the Map......................................... 5-6
Removing Candidate Status from a Property ................................................ 5-6
What Happens When Search Areas Overlap? .............................................. 5-7
About Using GPS ................................................................................................ 5-8
Positioning the GPS Receiver........................................................................ 5-8
Using GPS...................................................................................................... 5-8
Using Filters......................................................................................................... 5-9
Organising Filters ........................................................................................... 5-9
Adding Filters ................................................................................................. 5-9
Editing Filters................................................................................................ 5-12
Deleting Filters ............................................................................................. 5-12
Moving Filters............................................................................................... 5-12
Displaying Filters.......................................................................................... 5-13
Example Filters ............................................................................................ 5-13
Setting Default Identifiers .................................................................................. 5-20
Converting Files................................................................................................. 5-21
About Creating Your Own Vectors and Polygons ............................................. 5-21
Creating Your Own Vectors and Polygons .................................................. 5-21
Adding Attributes to a Vector or Polygon..................................................... 5-23
About the Vector Editor ................................................................................ 5-24
Importing Vector Data .................................................................................. 5-25
Using Polygons to Count the Number of Sites in an Area........................... 5-26
Troubleshooting Vector Attributes................................................................ 5-26
Editing the Map Data......................................................................................... 5-26
Editing Terrain Height .................................................................................. 5-27
Editing Clutter Types.................................................................................... 5-27
Editing Building Heights ............................................................................... 5-29
Using Site Status Flags..................................................................................... 5-31
Viewing Flags for Sites................................................................................. 5-32
Examples of Flags........................................................................................ 5-32
Using Attachments ............................................................................................ 5-33
Contents iv ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Adding Attachments...................................................................................... 5-33
Viewing Attachments ....................................................................................5-33
Using Photographs ............................................................................................ 5-33
Associating a Photograph with Equipment ................................................... 5-33
Associating a Photograph with a Site...........................................................5-34
Using Site Acquisition Details ............................................................................ 5-35
6 Storing and Changing Data
Overview of Changing and Storing Data .............................................................6-1
Adding and Editing Objects in the Site Database Window.................................. 6-2
Deleting Network Elements ............................................................................6-2
Troubleshooting Adding Sites......................................................................... 6-3
About Properties ..................................................................................................6-4
Viewing and Changing Property and Contact Details .................................... 6-5
Making Changes to Network Elements................................................................6-6
About the Tabs on the Site Database Window............................................... 6-7
About the Tabs Shown When a Cell is Selected.......................................... 6-10
About the Tabs Shown When a Cell Layer is Selected................................ 6-14
About the Tabs Shown When A Property is Selected.................................. 6-21
About Setting The Parameters For A Logical Network...................................... 6-23
About The Tabs Shown When A Logical Network Is Selected..................... 6-23
About The Tabs Shown When A PLMN Is Selected .................................... 6-23
About The Tabs Shown When A Logical Node Is Selected......................... 6-24
Making Global Changes to Network Elements .................................................. 6-24
Viewing and Changing Link Information ............................................................ 6-27
About the Tabs in the Link Information Window........................................... 6-28
About the Link Global Editor ......................................................................... 6-28
Opening the Link Database at a Particular Link ........................................... 6-28
Defining and Removing BCF Types .................................................................. 6-29
Why Store Equipment Details in ENTERPRISE?..............................................6-30
Viewing and Changing Equipment Details......................................................... 6-30
About Viewing and Changing Antennas and MW Antennas ........................ 6-30
About Viewing and Changing Site Equipment.............................................. 6-33
About Viewing and Changing Cell Equipment.............................................. 6-34
About Viewing and Changing Feeders......................................................... 6-35
About Viewing and Changing Cabins........................................................... 6-35
About Viewing and Changing Masts............................................................. 6-36
About Viewing and Changing Equipment Suppliers Details......................... 6-36
Making Changes to the Database .....................................................................6-37
Troubleshooting Applying and Committing................................................... 6-39
7 Importing and Exporting
About Importing and Exporting ............................................................................7-1
Overview of Importing Data ................................................................................. 7-1
Importing ENTERPRISE Data........................................................................ 7-2
Importing GSM Data....................................................................................... 7-2
Importing NEPTUNE Data.............................................................................. 7-2
Importing PlaNet/EET Data ............................................................................ 7-2
Importing NPS/X Data .................................................................................... 7-4
Importing Property Data.................................................................................. 7-4
Importing XML Data........................................................................................ 7-5
Overview of Exporting Data................................................................................. 7-6
Exporting Coverage (MapInfo) Data............................................................... 7-6
Exporting ENTERPRISE Data........................................................................ 7-9
Exporting Coverage (GSM) .......................................................................... 7-10
Exporting Coverage (InterGraph) ................................................................. 7-10
Exporting NEPTUNE Data............................................................................ 7-10
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide Contents v
Version 4.0
Exporting PlaNet/EET Data.......................................................................... 7-11
Exporting Property Data............................................................................... 7-12
Exporting XML Data..................................................................................... 7-12
Importing and Exporting Equipment .................................................................. 7-14
A File Formats
Overview of File Formats .................................................................................... A-1
Map Data Format ................................................................................................ A-1
Height Data Format........................................................................................ A-2
Clutter Data.................................................................................................... A-3
Backdrops ...................................................................................................... A-4
Vector Data .................................................................................................... A-7
Population Vector Data .................................................................................. A-9
Building Vector Data .................................................................................... A-11
Building Raster Data .................................................................................... A-13
Text Data...................................................................................................... A-13
ENTERPRISE Data Formats............................................................................. A-15
Exporting and Importing Whole Projects...................................................... A-15
Exporting Data as XML ................................................................................ A-16
Importing XML Data ..................................................................................... A-17
GSM Import .................................................................................................. A-17
GSM Import Carriers File ............................................................................. A-18
GSM Import Exceptions File ........................................................................ A-19
GSM Neighbours Import File........................................................................ A-19
Properties Import.......................................................................................... A-20
Properties Export ......................................................................................... A-20
Coverage and Interference Arrays............................................................... A-21
Interference Tables ...................................................................................... A-25
Neighbours................................................................................................... A-27
Predictions.................................................................................................... A-27
Traffic Raster................................................................................................ A-29
Example Traffic Raster Files........................................................................ A-30
View Favourites............................................................................................ A-30
NEPTUNE Data Formats .................................................................................. A-32
Site Database............................................................................................... A-32
NEPTUNE Carriers ...................................................................................... A-34
NEPTUNE Neighbours................................................................................. A-35
Miscellaneous Vendor Formats......................................................................... A-36
Antenna Diagrams ....................................................................................... A-36
Miscellaneous Vendors Carriers File Format............................................... A-37
Carrier Types................................................................................................ A-39
Miscellaneous Vendors Exceptions File Format .......................................... A-41
Miscellaneous Vendors Neighbours File Format ......................................... A-42
Miscellaneous Vendors Site Database File Format ..................................... A-43
Status Flags ................................................................................................. A-46
Colour Palette File Format ................................................................................ A-48
B Collecting Site Information
Example Site Information Survey Form .............................................................. B-1
General ................................................................................................................ B-1
Visual Inspection ................................................................................................. B-2
Accessibility.................................................................................................... B-2
Site Description.............................................................................................. B-2
Demographics ................................................................................................ B-2
Existing Networks........................................................................................... B-3
Neighbours..................................................................................................... B-3
Available Photographs ................................................................................... B-3
Contents vi ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Line of Sight ................................................................................................... B-3
Test and Cell Information.................................................................................... B-4
Mast Height.................................................................................................... B-4
LOS Information............................................................................................. B-4
CW Measurements........................................................................................ B-5
Height Profile from Map Data in Asset .......................................................... B-5
Neighbours .................................................................................................... B-5
Frequency Available ...................................................................................... B-6
Channels Available........................................................................................ B-6
Distance from BSC........................................................................................ B-6
Thresholds ..................................................................................................... B-6
Service Information............................................................................................. B-7
Equipment...................................................................................................... B-7
Preferred Mast Type...................................................................................... B-7
BTS Equipment.............................................................................................. B-8
Cell Equipment .............................................................................................. B-8
Feeder Type .................................................................................................. B-8
Connector ...................................................................................................... B-9
Combiner ....................................................................................................... B-9
Map Data ....................................................................................................... B-9
Coverage Level Requirements.................................................................... B-10
Coverage Report ......................................................................................... B-10
Existing Site................................................................................................. B-10
Handover Margins ....................................................................................... B-10
Erlang Rate.................................................................................................. B-10
Delivery Date ............................................................................................... B-11
Frequency Channels Available.................................................................... B-11
Estimated Traffic.......................................................................................... B-11
Blocking rates .............................................................................................. B-11
Network Connections........................................................................................ B-12
Microwave Antennas ................................................................................... B-12
Connection Type.......................................................................................... B-12
LOS Information........................................................................................... B-12
Predictions ................................................................................................... B-13
Rainfall ......................................................................................................... B-13
MW Antennas .............................................................................................. B-13
Frequency.................................................................................................... B-14
Power........................................................................................................... B-14
Terrain Type ................................................................................................ B-14
Radio Equipment ......................................................................................... B-15
Link Terminal Equipment ............................................................................. B-15
Feeder Info .................................................................................................. B-16
Repeater ...................................................................................................... B-16
C Coordinate Systems and Datums
About Coordinate Systems and Datums ............................................................ C-1
Supported Co-ordinate Systems......................................................................... C-2
Supported Map Projections ................................................................................ C-4
Supported Ellipsoids ........................................................................................... C-5
Supported Datums.............................................................................................. C-7
Index i
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 1 1
Version 4.0
1 Introduction
About the Products in the ENTERPRISE Suite
AIRCOM International's ENTERPRISE suite of products are advanced integrated
support tools which provide unprecedented planning, optimisation and
performance management functionality and work seamlessly together, sharing
mission critical information without duplication.
The ENTERPRISE products link to a common industry standard relational database
(RDBMS) where you can store all your network data. In addition, ENTERPRISE
products use the same user-friendly Geographical Information System (GIS) to give
you a common look and feel.
The ENTERPRISE products are:
Product Description
Administrator For specifying and configuring your database, projects and users
ARCHITECT Cell Site Design; Equipment Configuration and Inventory
ASSET Radio Network Planning and Information Management
CONNECT Network Transmission and Microwave Link Planning Software
DIRECT Transmission & Core Network Capacity Planning and Dimensioning
Tool
HOMEZONE Automated Coverage Prediction Tool
NEPTUNE GSM Testmobile Analysis and Auto-Diagnostics
OPTIMA Network Performance Monitoring, Reporting and Management
TARGET Cellular Engineering Project Management
3G UMTS/ W-CDMA Radio Network Planning
1 2 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About This Manual
This manual describes functionality that is common to more than one of the
products in the ENTERPRISE suite, such as how to access, view, edit and store data.
This table shows where to look for what information in this manual:
Read For Information On
Chapter 2
Setting up a project
Starting ENTERPRISE
Setting your preferences
Synchronising projects (for laptop use)
Chapter 3
the user interface
Chapter 4
Adding and editing network elements in the Map View window
Displaying items in the Map View window
Changing the display properties of items
Chapter 5
Using candidate and nominal Properties
Using filters
Using Vectors and polygons
Chapter 6
Adding and editing network elements in the Site Database window
Descriptions of the tabs that appear for each network element
Applying and Committing
Appendix A
Reference information on file formats used in ENTERPRISE
Appendix B
A sample site information form showing the maximum information
you could need before planning the network using ENTERPRISE
Appendix C
A list of supported co-ordinate systems, projections, ellipsoids and
datums.
For More Information
Obtaining Help
ENTERPRISE products come with a complete system of online Help which you can
access in three ways:
From the Help menu, click Help Contents. Scroll through the table of contents
and choose a relevant topic to display.
To search for something particular, from the Help menu, click Help Contents
and on the Index tab, type in a word.
Context-sensitive help is available for most of the dialog boxes. Therefore, to
get relevant Help about using a dialog box, in the dialog box, press F1.
We value your comments, suggestions, and criticisms. If you did not find the Help
you were looking for, needed more assistance than the online help provided, or
have any suggestions for future improvements to our online information, we want
to know. Please email your comments to docs@aircom.co.uk.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 1 3
Version 4.0
Obtaining Support
If you have any difficulties that you cannot resolve yourself using the online Help,
or you believe that you have found a fault in the software, please contact the
AIRCOM Product Support Group.
This table shows the contact details:
If you are in Email Phone Fax
North and South
America
support@aircominc.com +1 214 891 8060 +1 214 891 8061
Singapore and Asia support@aircom.com.sg +65 372 0548 +65 372 0350
Rest of World support@aircom.co.uk +44 (0) 1737
775777
+44 (0) 1737
775770
When contacting us, it would help us if you:
Give us as much information as possible about the problem and the context in
which it occurred
State the version and build you are using
Have all the details of your query to hand
Are logged into the ENTERPRISE application
Can send extracts of your data sets if we need them to reproduce your
problem
Obtaining Further Services
Training
If you require details of mobile and fixed network training courses, run by AIRCOM
International, please contact us at our email address support@aircom.co.uk or via
our website http://www.aircom.co.uk.
Consultancy Services
AIRCOM International also provide full radio consultancy services in Network
Audits, Business Planning Support, Licence Applications, Radio Network Planning,
Telecommunications Research and System Modelling and Propagation Analysis and
Modelling.
Linking to the AIRCOM Website
For additional information about AIRCOM International products and services,
check the AIRCOM International website at http://www.aircom.co.uk.
Printing Your Own Copy of ENTERPRISE Manuals
If you prefer to read information in manual form, rather than online help, you can
view the manuals supplied as PDFs (Adobe portable document format) on the
ENTERPRISE CD, or print out your own copies of them on a postscript printer.
1 4 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Tip : You can choose to install the PDFs on your PC when installing.
Note : Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
This table describes the manuals:
This Manual Contains Information On
What's New The main differences between the latest versions of the
ENTERPRISE Suite.
Administrator and
Installation Guide
Installing and configuring ENTERPRISE, your network, and Oracle
databases. Using Administrator to create users, groups and set
permissions.
Also contains information on software licensing.
ENTERPRISE User
Reference
Functionality that is common to more than one of the products in
the ENTERPRISE suite, including how to access, view, edit and
store data.
Also contains reference information about file formats.
ENTERPRISE Database
Reference
The relationships between tables in the ENTERPRISE database
and the contents of each table.
ARCHITECT User
Reference
Using ARCHITECT specific features such as creating, editing and
sharing drawings (configurations).
ASSET User Reference Using ASSET including information on hierarchical network
planning, propagation modelling, coverage analysis, traffic
planning, neighbour list definition, automatic frequency planning
and CW data analysis.
Also contains reference information about file formats.
CONNECT User Reference Using CONNECT, the network transmission and microwave link
planning software for full network physical link design and logical
link design.
Also contains CONNECT-specific reference information.
DIRECT User Reference Using DIRECT to design telecommunications networks of different
network layers. Explains how to plan cellular, PSTN and data
networks at a both general and strategic level.
Also contains DIRECT-specific reference information.
NEPTUNE User Reference Using NEPTUNE to collect, import and analyse testmobile data and
using the optional module, PROBE for additional analysis.
Also contains reference information on NEPTUNE file formats.
OPTIMA User Reference Using OPTIMA to view performance data and statistics both as part
of ENTERPRISE, and over the internet.
TARGET User Reference Using TARGET as an administrator to design forms, Gantt charts
and reports. Using TARGET to view and edit information about your
network and its roll out. Also contains TARGET reference
information.
3G User Reference Using the radio planning tool for 3rd Generation mobile
communications networks.
HOMEZONE User
Reference
Using HOMEZONE to automatically generate coverage predictions
and best server arrays, which gives you instantaneous display of
coverage and interference information for pre-selected filters when
loaded into ASSET.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 1 5
Version 4.0
For any further documentation, such as application notes and extra reference
information, please email support@aircom.co.uk.
To use the PDFs:
1. Make sure you have Adobe Acrobat Reader installed on your PC. If you do
not have this, you can install it from the ENTERPRISE CD, or get it from the
Adobe website at http://www.adobe.com.
2. Navigate to the Docs folder. If you installed your product in the default
location, this is:
C:\Program Files\AIRCOM International\Enterprise 4.0\Docs
3. If this folder does not exist or is empty, modify your ENTERPRISE
installation now and choose to install them. To do this:
From the Control Panel, double-click Add/Remove Programs.
In the list of items, choose ENTERPRISE 4.0 and click the Add/Remove
button.
When prompted, select Modify then click Next twice until you are on the
Select Components page of the installation wizard.
Ensure that the documentation you require is selected. For example:
4. When installed, in the Docs folder, double-click the pdf file that you want to
open.
Note : For updated versions of PDF files, see the AIRCOM International
website, at http://www.aircom.co.uk.

1 6 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 1
Version 4.0
2 Setting Up a Project
Overview of Setting Up a Project
This chapter describes the following topics:
Logging into a database
Opening an existing project
Creating a new project
Setting your preferences
Entering the data needed for calculations
Synchronising a project
Logging into a Database
Before you can log in to a database, an administrator must have used the
ENTERPRISE Administrator program to set you up as an authorised user of a
database. For information on using this product, see the ENTERPRISE Installation
and Administration Guide.
To log in to a database:
1. From the File menu, click Login or click the Login button .
2. On the Database Login dialog box, ensure the correct database is shown in
the Data Source box.
3. Enter your user ID and password, and then click Login. For example:
2 2 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Opening an Existing Project
When you have logged into a database, the Start Project dialog box appears,
showing any projects that are currently available within the database.
If when creating a project, you or your administrator chose to share project data
with another project, you will see a hierarchy in this dialog box, with the project
whose data is shared at the top level and the newer project as a subfolder. Only two
levels are permitted.
This picture shows an example:
Start Project Dialog box
To open an existing project:
1. In the Start Project dialog box, select the project you require.
2. If the project contains large numbers of sites, and you have permission to do
so, you can choose to load only a specific area, rather than opening the whole
project. For information on doing this, see page 2-11.
3. Click Start.
If the Start button is unavailable to you, contact your administrator to ensure
you have the correct permissions.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 3
Version 4.0
Modifying an Existing Project
If you have administrator rights, you can modify all aspects of an existing project.
If you do not have administrator rights, you can only select to override database
settings, that is, the directories for map data and user preferences, predictions and
colours.
To modify a project:
1. In the Start Project dialog box, select the required project and click Info>> to
access the project settings.
2. Make the changes you require. For more information on this, see page 2-4
onwards.
Creating a New Project
If you have permission to do so, you can create a new project. To do this:
1. In the Start Project dialog box, click Add.
2. In the Table Selection dialog box, select New Project Data unless you want to
share an existing project, then click Continue.
Important : Only share data if your map data cannot be contained within a
single projection or zone as then you will need multiple projects to accurately
model the site co-ordinates.
If you choose to share project data, the project whose data becomes shared is
at the top level of the tree shown in the Start Project dialog box with the new
project shown underneath. You cannot share projects whose project data is
already shared.
3. In the Modify Project dialog box, set up your project including:
On the Map Data Directories tab, enter the locations that contain the
various index files for map data elements you are using. If your map data
does not contain a particular element, leave the box for that type of data
blank.
On the User Data Directories tab, specify paths for certain user
preferences, such as favourite views. Also indicate if you want to load in
all your own user vectors, all the user vectors for the people in your group,
or all user vectors. For information on setting up groups, see the
ENTERPRISE Installation and Administration Guide.
2 4 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
More information about what to specify on all the tabs of the Modify Project
dialog box is described in the following sections.
4. When you have entered all the required information on the tabs, click OK.
Override Database Directory Settings
Your ENTERPRISE administrator should have configured the database directory
settings for all the projects stored in the database, so you will not want to override
database directory settings.
However, if you are working remotely with a copy of the database on a laptop and
no longer have a connection to the map data file server, you must override the
global settings by selecting the Override Database Directory check box, then setting
these directories to be your local ones:
Map data
Predictions
Preferences
Colour palette
You cannot override any other settings unless you have administrator privileges.
Note : If you have created user vectors that you want to use on the laptop, you will
need to import the vector files to your new folder.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 5
Version 4.0
About the Coord System Tab
Mapping data is only valid for the particular co-ordinate system to which it relates,
so it is important to set this correctly. ENTERPRISE is designed to work with one
(and only one) projection/ellipsoid combination per project. The
Projection/ellipsoid settings for the project MUST match the settings for the map
data that will be used since the map data is stored in cartesian not spherical
coordinates.
On the Coord System tab of the Modify Project dialog box, you can set which co-
ordinate system group, coordinate system, datum and unit of measurement are
used.
Important : The ENTERPRISE administrator must load the coordinate systems
database before it can be used by ENTERPRISE users. For information on this, refer
to the ENTERPRISE Installation and Administration Guide.
The default values for the map coordinate system are shown in this table:
Value Default for Map Coordinate System
Coordinate System Group BRITISH
Coordinate System NATIONAL-GRID
Datum ORD SURVEY GB
Units METERS
The Map coordinate system is used to translate between geographic coordinates and
cartesian coordinates based on the projection system used by the mapping data.
To edit these values:
1. Click the Change button.
The Coordinate system dialog box appears. This picture shows an example:
2 6 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
2. Select the coordinate group that you want to use. You can create a new group
by clicking the New Group button.
3. For each coordinate group, there is separate list of coordinate systems,
datums and projections. You can use the default option, or select another
from the list.
As well as the supplied map projections and ellipsoids, you can create new
ellipsoids or edit existing projections or ellipsoids. For information on how to
do this, see below.
Note : You can create your own coordinate system by clicking the New
Coordinate System button. You must do this if you have created your own
group.
4. If required, you can edit the projection parameters, which can include origin
latitude and longitude, and also false northing and easting.
Important : Ensure that you set the Linear Unit to be meters.
Note : Depending on which coordinate system you select, you will have a
different set of values that you can edit. For a list of the supported coordinate
systems, refer to Appendix C.
5. When you have edited the coordinate system group values, click Save. If the
values have been saved successfully, click OK and then OK again.
6. If you want to set the Coordinate System data values for a Visualisation
coordinate system as well, select the Visualisation option, then click the
Change button and choose the values as required for each setting.
The Visualisation coordinate system enables you to specify geographic
coordinates using different datum to that specified by the Map coordinate
system. You might typically use this so that geographic coordinates reported
by a GPS receiver could be entered directly into the planning tool, regardless
of the map coordinate system.
Warning : You should not change these settings after sites have been created
in the site database otherwise they will shift locations with regard to the map
data. This is because location is stored in longitude and latitude while map
data is in a grid and the projection settings control the relationship between
the two.
About Map Projections
Map projections are attempts to represent a spheroid/ellipsoidal Earth on a flat
mapping surface. However, because the Earth is a three-dimensional body, it
cannot be depicted on a two-dimensional surface. As a result, map projections are a
compromise, as the two-dimension map must distort one or more of the Earth's
properties to reduce the distortion of the other.
For more information on the different map projections that are supported by
ENTERPRISE, see Appendix C.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 7
Version 4.0
Editing Map Projections
To edit map projections:
1. On the Coord System tab of the Modify Project dialog box, click the
Create/Edit Projections button.
2. In the dialog box that appears, select the required projection, and change the
parameters as required.
Important : Ensure that you set the Linear Unit to be meters.
3. Click OK to save your changes.
Creating and Modifying Ellipsoids
An ellipsoid is a mathematical figure generated by the revolution of an ellipse about
one of its axes. Ellipsoidal earth models are required for accurate range and bearing
calculations over long distances. Ellipsoidal models define an ellipsoid with an
equatorial radius and a polar radius.
For information on the ellipsoids supported by ENTERPRISE,see Appendix C.
To create or modify ellipsoids:
1. On the Coord System tab of the Modify Project dialog box, click the
Create/Edit Ellipsoids button.
2. In the Create/Edit Ellipsoid dialog box, create an ellipsoid by clicking New
and then entering the new ellipsoid parameters.
3. In the Create/Edit Ellipsoid dialog box, edit an ellipsoid by selecting the
ellipsoid and then editing the parameters:
Important : Ensure that you set the Linear Unit to be meters.
5. If you want to create or edit another ellipsoid, click Save and then proceed.
or
If you have finished creating and editing ellipsoids, click OK.
Tip: To delete an ellipsoid from the list, select the ellipsoid and click Remove.
2 8 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Creating and Editing Datums
The geographical coordinate systems use a spheroid to calculate positions on the
earth, and in addition to this, a datum defines the position of the spheroid relative to
the centre of the earth. A complete datum is comprised of at least eight constants
three to specify the location of the origin, three to specify the orientation of the
coordinate system, and two to specify the dimensions of the reference ellipsoid.
To create or edit datums:
1. On the Coord System tab of the Modify Project dialog box, click the
Create/Edit Datums button.
2. In the Create/Edit Datum dialog box, create a datum by clicking New and
then entering the new datum parameters.
3. In the Create/Edit Datum dialog box, edit a datum by selecting the datum
and then editing the parameters. This picture shows an example Create/Edit
Datum dialog box:
Important : Ensure that you set the Linear Unit to be meters.
4. If you want to create or edit another datum, click Save and proceed.
or
If you have finished creating or editing datums, click OK.
Tip : If you want to delete a datum from the list, select the datum and click
Remove.
For information on the datums supported by ENTERPRISE, see Appendix C.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 9
Version 4.0
About the Map Data Directories Tab
On the Map Data Directories tab of the Modify Project dialog box, enter the
locations that contain the various index files for map data elements you are using.
You can either use the (browse) button to find the directory, or type in the
pathname.
If your map data does not contain a particular element, leave the box for that type of
data blank.
It is important that you set up your map data directories to point to the correct
folders. If you do not do this, for example, if you have pointed your building rasters
directory to a folder that actually contains building vectors, when you try and
display the building raster data you will see a message in the Message Log
informing you that the resolution was invalid.
Tip : In the Backdrops box, specify a path to a folder that can contain map
backdrops and aerial photos as subfolders. An index file and data file(s) should exist
in each of the sub-directories. For example:
Note : When setting directories for vectors, ensure these directories are ones you
wish to use, as changing them later may give you duplicates in the database.
About the User Data Directories Tab
On the User Data Directories tab of the Modify Project dialog box, you can specify
directory paths for certain user preferences, such as favourite views.
Also specify a directory where all your predictions will be stored, and a directory for
coverage arrays.
You can make this information unique per project, and can enter paths to directories
that are currently empty.
In the colour palette box, enter the path to a text file that details the RGB values for
the 253 colours that are used in your project.
Also, specify a path where you will store your user vectors and indicate if you want
to load in your own user vectors only, the user vectors for everyone in your Group,
or all user vectors that exist in the database.
Note : This depends on the paths to other people's user vectors being shared.
If you want to edit other people's user vectors, you will need the correct
permissions, which are set by your administrator.
2 10 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About the Map Data Extents Tab
On the Map Data Extents tab of the Modify Project dialog box, click Calculate for
ENTERPRISE to read the map data and set the grid co-ordinates so that the whole of
the mapped area can be viewed. An automatic border of 5% is included.
This means that when the map is first opened, it will display the correct part of the
world.
Tip : If the extents look really incorrect, it is likely that erroneous points exist in one
of the map data index files.
If you require only a part of the mapped area, then these can be set manually to
cover a smaller area, by entering the grid co-ordinates of the extent of the map that
you want to be visible in the Map View window.
About the Region Load Tab
Use the Region Load tab of the Modify Project dialog box to load only sites in a
specified region.
This is useful when you have large numbers of sites and Properties in a database but
are only interested in a some of them, for example those in a particular region. You
can load this subset of data and this will speed up ENTERPRISE.
Loading a region will:
Load only sites, Properties and links in the region you choose
Load all MSCs and BSCs
Still enable you to add sites to all areas or move sites outside the chosen
region
For information about how to load a region, see page 2-11.
About the Info Tab
Use the Info tab of the Modify Project dialog box for adding supplementary
information about your project.
This tab stores the time and date when the project was created and when it was last
modified.
If required, you can enter a brief description of the project and any further
comments related to it.
Note: The settings on this tab can only be stored in the database.
About the Optima Login Tab
If OPTIMA is installed, the OPTIMA tab of the Modify Project dialog box acts as a
login screen and gives you access to OPTIMA if required.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 11
Version 4.0
About the TARGET and ARCHITECT Tabs
If you have TARGET or ARCHITECT installed, you will see the TARGET and
ARCHITECT tabs on the Modify Project dialog box. This is where you need to
specify a location for the TARGET and ARCHITECT master files.
The master file for each product contains the layout of all the user-defined forms
and is usually located in a shared folder on a network drive. When you change the
design of a form, the changes are stored in a copy of this file on your local PC until
you choose the Update Master File menu option.
About the 3g Folders Tab
If you have 3g installed, the Modify Project dialog box will contain a 3g Folders tab.
On this tab, you set up the folders that will be used for storing distributed
simulations. These make use of extra processing power by enabling you to perform
Monte Carlo simulation snapshots on a collection of networked PCs then merge the
results. This folder should be a network location, accessible to your own PC and all
the clients that you want to use.
Important : In this folder you should set up folders whose names correspond to the
logged in ENTERPRISE users who will be participating in distributed simulations,
for example, demouser.
Loading a Subset of Project Data
If you have large numbers of sites in a project, you may want to load only some of
the sites, in a particular area. To do this, you can either:
On the Region Load tab, type in the co-ordinates you require and click OK
or
Select using a Map View window
To select using a Map View window:
1. On the Region Load tab, click Select Region.
2. In the Map View window that appears, click with the right mouse button and
from the menu that appears, click Properties.
3. Choose to display something, for example Coastline.
4. Click with the right mouse button again and this time, choose one of the
Zoom options to zoom to the area you require.
Tip : Select an area slightly bigger than the one you are immediately
interested in, so that you capture interference from surrounding sites when
creating arrays.
2 12 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
5. When you have displayed the area you are interested in, close the Map View
window, and the co-ordinates shown on the tab are updated:
When you open the project, all the MSCs and BSCs in the project are loaded
but with only the Properties, sites, links and neighbour relations from the
selected area.
Note : All applied but uncommitted sites are always visible.
Setting Up Your Preferences
Setting up your preferences is the first step to do after you have set up and opened a
project, and before you begin planning a network. If you do not set your preferences
properly, you could render your whole network plan worthless.
To open this dialog box:
From the File menu, click Preferences.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 13
Version 4.0
This picture shows an example of the Preferences dialog box:
Note : If you have CONNECT installed, you will see an additional tab, the
CONNECT tab. See the CONNECT User Reference Guide for information on this.
Setting General Preferences
On the General tab of the Preferences dialog box, choose between these units for
field strength:
Units Description
dBV/m The frequency becomes significant and you cannot plan for multiple frequency bands,
for example, GSM 900/1800.
dBm The frequency term is ignored although it is currently used for the Intergraph export.
The choice of unit will be used throughout the installed products, for example, in
the Coverage Properties dialog box.
If you require to do so, you can change the conversion formula when in dBm mode.
Doing this will affect the radio network plan, for example, the coverage predictions
and so on.
Select the Use check box to enable the use of frequency bands in ENTERPRISE, for
example in the intermodulation part of ILSA, the automatic frequency planning tool.
This will affect the radio network plan, for example, interference analyses.
2 14 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
You can also enable quick access to the Site Database and/or Links Database. If you
select these check boxes, then when you hold down Control and click a site or link in
the Map View window, the appropriate database will open automatically at that
item.
Select the FCC Category check box to enable the use of FCC functionality in ASSET.
This will enable you to view the Site Area Boundary for the FCC in the ASSET 2D
view as well as run the FCC Reporting function.
Setting Distance Preferences
On the Distance tab of the Preferences dialog box, set the units of distance to either
metric or imperial for use throughout the installed products.
On this tab, you can also use the metric to imperial converter, if you have something
that you want to convert to other units. To do this:
Select the type of units you are converting from, type in the number, select
the units you want to convert to, and click Do Conversion.
Setting Earth Radius Preferences
On the Earth Radius tab of the Preferences dialog box, you can set the true earth
radius (usually 6370 km) and the geoclimatic factor k (usually 1.3333333), for
various calculations throughout the installed products.
The effective earth radius is then calculated for you.
Setting Network Preferences
On the Network tab of the Preferences dialog box:
Set the network type you require. Choose between GSM, AMPS/TDMA and
TETRA.
Choose the preferred method for creating links:
Select If You Want ENTERPRISE
Don't Auto-Create
Network Connections
Not to make any visible physical connections when you add a
new network element. (Although in the Site Database, you will
see some sort of physical connections if you are displaying by
physical links.)
Auto-Create For Current
Network Type
To make a physical connection automatically between a
newly BSC and the nearest MSC, or between a newly added
site and the nearest BSC or distribution node, depending on
what you have selected in the in BTS parenting pane.
To see these changes, ensure you select to view links in the
Map View window:
Auto-Create For All
Network Types
To make physical connections automatically as described
above, but just not take into consideration the network type at
all.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 15
Version 4.0
If you are using GSM or TETRA, you can also choose the method of parenting
for new sites that you add in the Map View window:
Select For
Add New BTSs to
nearest BSC
New sites to be connected directly to the BSC
Add New BTSs to
nearest Distribution Node
New sites to be connected to the BSC via the distribution
node
For example, if you choose to parent new sites on distribution nodes, then
choose to display the Site Database window by Physical Links in the Settings
dialog box, sites are displayed under distribution nodes.
Choose whether to have auto-parenting on or off
Setting Diffraction Preferences
On the Diffraction tab of the Preferences dialog box, select the model that will be
used in the height profile and link availability calculations. For more information on
the different options, see Appendix B of this manual.
Setting Candidate Options Preferences
In ENTERPRISE, a nominal Property is a Property placed in an approximate
location, that you can use as a way of indicating that you need a site somewhere
near this area. Using the search area of the nominal Property, you define the radius
that you consider as suitable for your new Property. In this search area, you can
place a number of other Properties called candidates - that are possible alternative
locations for the new site.
On the Candidate Options tab of the Preferences dialog box, you can choose to
enable and change candidate functionality. This will apply to any search areas you
create after selecting this option, but will not affect any existing search areas you
may have defined.
2 16 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
This picture shows the tab:
Candidate options tab of the Preferences dialog box
On this tab, in the Automate pane, you can:
Select To
Candidate Status Apply candidate status to any Properties in a search area you create.
Renaming Rename any candidates with the same name as the nominal, plus a
letter prefix.
Capturing candidates Add candidates status to Properties when you enlarge the search area
to include them, or remove candidate status from Properties that no
longer fall into a reduced search area.
Not selecting this option means that when you resize a search area the
numbers of candidates remains the same.
In the Nominal Restrictions pane, select whether you can move the nominal site or
not.
In the Candidate Restrictions pane, select whether you can move the candidates
anywhere, move them only within the search area, or not move them at all.
In the Candidate's BTS Equipment pane, select whether you want:
The candidate's existing equipment to remain the same
The candidate's existing equipment to be removed and replaced with the
nominals
The candidate's existing equipment to be added to with the equipment from
the nominal
For more information on using candidates and nominals, see Chapter 5.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 17
Version 4.0
Entering the Necessary Data for Calculations
When you have set up the information for your project in the Modify Project dialog
box, and started your project, before you perform any site planning, you should set
up the following data as a minimum, although it is recommended that you add as
much accurate data as possible at an early stage.
For a list of the minimum data needed when planning a network, see Appendix B.
In some cases, if no data is present, the calculations will not work properly; in less
critical areas, a value will be used as a default.
This table shows the data that you should set up as a minimum:
Item Minimum Data that Must Be Defined
Propagation model One propagation model (necessary in order to provide coverage
data)
Equipment One antenna must be defined (for accurate coverage predictions)
It is also desirable to add at least one example of the other
equipment types, BTS Equipment, Masts, Cabins, Cell Equipment.
Frequency group One frequency group
Cell Layers At least one cell layer
Carrier Layers One control channel and one traffic channel (in order to run the
frequency planning functionality)
Terminal type Terminal types
Hexagon Radii Hexagon Radii
Preferences The units you want for field strength and distance, the Earth Radius
and geoclimatic factor(k), and network type
Project-wide colour
settings
Colours for the various data elements on the map view
Site ID Prefix A scheme for naming new sites and cells
Note : You must have appropriate permissions to add this information. If you
cannot, see your administrator.
2 18 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Synchronising Projects
You can copy some of the data in a project to a remote project and work on this
remote copy without needing a network connection to a particular database. You
can do this by using the Synchronisation Utility.
The Synchronisation Utility
The advantages of using synchronisation are that you can:
Work on a project from a standalone computer and have the same capabilities
as if you were networked, such as editing data, creating sites, and so on
At a later date, merge any changes in to the master database selectively and
intelligently with all the relevant information displayed
Have complete control over which changes are merged back into the master
project. You can choose to Apply or Commit or ignore any change that you
have made remotely.
Note : Before you begin, ensure that the remote computer has an ENTERPRISE
database set up on its hard drive and copies of the same map data that is in use in
the master database.
The steps involved in synchronising a project are as follows:
1. Exporting a subset of the master project data to a transfer file
2. Copying the exported data to a new remote project
3. Updating changes to the transfer file ready for synchronisation with the
master project
4. Choosing which changes you want to merge back into the master project
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 19
Version 4.0
This diagram illustrates the synchronisation process:
Master
Project
Transfer file
(containing subset
of master project data)
Synchronize
Export
Update
Create
Remote Laptop Network
Remote
Project
The Synchronisation Process
Exporting Data from a Project Using the Synchronisation Utility
To export data from a project for use on a remote PC:
1. Open the project whose data you want to export.
2. Open the Map View window and ensure that all the sites you want to export
are displayed.
Important : The Synchronisation Utility will export all of the relevant project
information for ALL MSCs and BSCS in the project, but ONLY those sites
shown in the Map View window. However, do not display more than 200
sites, because of memory constraints when merging large amounts of data
back into the master project.
3. From the File menu, click Synchronisation Utility.
4. Click the Select View >> button and ensure that the view is shown in the
wizard, then click Finish.
5. Select Export Master Project Information to Transfer File.
6. In the Transfer Filename box, type the name of the file (*.atf) and click
Continue.
2 20 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
A transfer file is created, which you will need to copy to your remote PC, so
you may want to save it to a floppy disk.
Now you are ready to copy the data into a remote project.
Copying the Exported Data to a New Project
When you have exported the project data that you require, you can make a smaller
copy of the project on your remote computer. To do this:
1. Ensure that the remote computer has an ENTERPRISE database set up on its
hard drive and copies of the same map data that is in use in the master
database. For more information on setting up a database, see the Installation
and Administration Guide.
2. On your remote computer, log in to ENTERPRISE but do not open a project.
3. From the File menu, click Synchronisation Utility.
4. Ensure Create Local Project Copy From Transfer File is selected.
5. Browse to the name of the transfer file that you created, containing the
exported data, then click Continue.
When finished, from the File menu, click Open Project. A remote copy of the
project is displayed in the Start Project dialog box:
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 21
Version 4.0
6. Click Info>> and ensure that you have set up the map directories to point to
the correct location on your remote PC. You may also need to check that your
map extents are correct, and if not click Calculate Extents.
7. Open the project and work on it in the usual way.
8. When you have finished working remotely, you will need to update the
transfer file.
Updating the Transfer File
To update the transfer file with your amended data:
1. From the File menu, click Synchronisation Utility.
2. Select Update Transfer File with Modified Data.
3. In the Transfer Filename box, browse to the file (*.atf) and click Continue.
The transfer file is updated.
Note : Any antennas you add in the remote project are synchronised to the
master project but will not be shared between other projects in the database.
Similarly, if you created a project on your remote PC (other than the remote
project copy) and added antennas to it, antennas will not be synchronised
with the master project, even if you chose to add the antenna to all projects on
your remote PC.
Now you need to use the transfer file to copy changes back to your master
database.
Updating the Master Database with Remote Changes
To view and copy the changes you made remotely to the master database:
1. Open the master database and the project that needs to be updated.
2. From the File menu, click Synchronisation Utility.
3. Select Synchronise Master Project.
4. Ensure the name of the file (*.atf) is shown in the Transfer Filename box and
click Continue.
The Synchronisation Utility analyses the changes held in the transfer file and
this dialog box appears that contains both Applied and Committed Changes
on two tabs:
Note : When you have synchronised the master project, the transfer file is
automatically deleted so cannot be updated with any further changes you
make in the remote project. To perform any more work remotely, delete the
old remote project and create a new one.
2 22 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
View details
Merge entry
Items that have
committed changes
made to them
Merge all entries
Indicates type
of change
Indicates
merged state
About the Synchronisation Dialog Box
The Synchronisation dialog box shows a list of all new or changed items that you
can add to the master project, organised under two tabs, Committed Changes and
Applied Changes.
This table shows what the record state can be:
Record State Description
Update An attribute of an existing object has been updated in the remote project.
Insertion A new object has been inserted into the remote project.
Deletion An existing object has been removed in the remote project.
The Merge column indicates whether the item will be merged with the master
database or not . By default, nothing will be merged and you choose whether
to merge selected items or all items. You can also view details of the changes for
items.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 2 23
Version 4.0
Viewing Details of Items
To view more details about an item:
On either the Applied Changes or Committed Changes tab, select the item in
the list and click the View Details button .
The dialog box that appears shows information about the changes. When the
change is an update, the Attribute Name, the Modified Value and the
Previous Value for that attribute are shown.
For even more information, you can double-click attributes that have this
symbol next to them.
Merging Changes
To merge the changes for item(s) into the master database:
1. On each tab, for individual items, select the item in the list and click the
Merge Entry button .
or
On each tab, click the Merge All Entries button to select all items in the
list.
A green check mark replaces the red cross next to each change
indicating that these changes will be merged.
If you have made a mistake, click RollBack to remove all your selections on
the displayed tab.
2. Click Commit.
Committed changes are committed. Applied changes are applied by the user
who is currently logged in. This is not necessarily the same user as the person
who made the changes remotely.
The transfer file is automatically deleted and you are logged out of the
project.
Note : when you have synchronised the master project, the transfer file is
automatically deleted so cannot be updated with any further changes you
make in the remote project. To perform any more work remotely, delete the
old remote project and create a new one.

2 24 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 1
Version 4.0
3 About the ENTERPRISE
User Interface
About the User Interface
This chapter describes the main user interface parts common to products in the
ENTERPRISE suite including:
The main menu containing the product tabs
About the main toolbar
The Preferences dialog box
The Site Database window
The Map View window
The 3D Map View window
The Message Log window
The Licence Manager window
The Wastebasket
About the Main Menu
The ENTERPRISE Main Menu
When you start ENTERPRISE, the tabs of the main menu appear at the top of the
screen. The rest of the ENTERPRISE display is transparent, so your desktop is
visible beneath the menus.
Each tab on the main menu corresponds to an ENTERPRISE product that is licensed
and installed.
3 2 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About the Main Toolbar Buttons
You can access the core functionality of ENTERPRISE either from the File menu or
from the main toolbar, shown here:
Exits ENTERPRISE
Login/Logout
of the database
Closes current
project, but leaves
you logged into the
database.
Opens a new
map view window
When you are logged into a
database but have no
project open, use this button
to open a new project.
There is also a toolbar on the Map View window that is described in this chapter.
For information on additional buttons added by other tools, see the appropriate
User Reference Guide..
About the Preferences Dialog Box
Use the Preferences dialog box to make changes to global settings (for all the
ENTERPRISE products you have installed).
Setting the preferences is the very first step when starting to use any of products in
the ENTERPRISE suite. If you do not set your preferences properly, you could
render your whole network plan worthless.
To access the Preferences dialog box:
From the File menu, click Preferences.
The tabs shown will depend on the products you have installed.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 3
Version 4.0
This picture shows an example of the Preferences dialog box:
Preferences dialog box
For information on setting the preferences in this dialog box, see Chapter 2.
About the ENTERPRISE Windows
A number of windows are common to products in the ENTERPRISE suite and they
are described here. They are:
Equipment Windows
Site Database window
Map View window
3D Map View window
Map Information window
Message Log
Licence Manager
Wastebasket
Other windows common to products in the ENTERPRISE suite are the Height
Profile and Master View windows that are described in Chapter 4 of this manual.
Tip : If you want a particular window to stay always on top, click with the right
mouse button on the window title and click Always On Top.
3 4 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About the Equipment Windows
The Equipment windows are described in this section.
About the Antennas Window
This section describes the Antennas window which is shown here:
Antennas Window
At the top of the Antennas Window is a tree list displaying all the antennas that
have been imported. You can add antennas to the All Projects folder and they will
be shared across all projects. You can also add antennas to the project folder that
you are working on. These will not be shared across all projects. For information on
how to do this see Chapter 6.
On the General tab:
In the Part ID box, enter a unique user-defined name of the selected antenna
to a maximum length of 32 characters
In the Description box, you can enter a description of the antenna if required
Click Photo to display a photograph of the component or to search for and
assign a photograph
The Created and Modified boxes are automatically written by ENTERPRISE
when a new antenna is created or modified
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 5
Version 4.0
On the Costing tab:
Select one of the manufacturers from the list of suppliers that you have
entered
Add a unit cost for the antenna
On the Mask tab:
Choose from Vertical or Horizontal radiation pattern for the selected antenna
Click Edit to see a table listing losses for different values of antenna azimuth
(or elevation). These losses are the reduction in antenna gain from the
antenna patterns point of maximum gain.
You can add and change data in the table and this is then reflected in the
antenna pattern illustration on the Mask tab
Important : For the angle, you should only enter whole degrees or half
degrees, otherwise ENTERPRISE will change it to the nearest half degree.
The Vertical and Horizontal beamwidths are automatically calculated and
displayed
On the Info tab:
Define the antenna gain for the selected antenna, referenced to either a dipole
(dBd) or an isotropic antenna (dBi)
Specify the frequency band of the antenna, the antenna front to back ratio,
and a loss caused by the use of cross-polar antennas. The front to back ratio is
the maximum power ration between the front and back of the antenna. The
larger the ratio, the more energy is directed forwards. What you enter here is
used for informational purposes only and not used in calculations.
Specify which type of polarisation is used in this antenna
Specify which form of tilt is used in this antenna
If you have ARCHITECT, you will also see an Icon tab where you can choose a
custom icon and click Apply or Commit to retain it.
About the MW Antennas Window
The MW Antennas window has the same layout as the Antenna window, only the
parameters on the tabs are slightly different:
On the General tab:
In the Part ID box, enter a unique user-defined name of the selected antenna
to a maximum length of 32 characters
In the Description box, you can enter a description of the antenna if required
Click Photo to display a photograph of the component or to search for and
assign a photograph
The Created and Modified boxes are automatically written by ENTERPRISE
when a new antenna is created or modified
3 6 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
On the Costing tab:
Select one of the manufacturers from the list of suppliers that you have
entered
Add a unit cost for the antenna
On the Mask tab:
Select the appropriate view. These views show antenna characteristics
graphically the first letter shows the polarisation that the antenna transmits
and the second letter shows the polarisation of the signal being received. V
stands for vertical and H for horizontal.
Click Edit to see a table listing losses for different values of antenna azimuth
(or elevation). These losses are the reduction in mw antenna gain from the
mw antenna patterns point of maximum gain.
You can add and change data in the table and this is then reflected in the mw
antenna pattern illustration on the Mask tab
Important : For the angle, you should only enter whole degrees or half
degrees, otherwise ENTERPRISE will change it to the nearest half degree.
Note : Make sure that you have entered all the required antenna radiation
patterns (VV, VH, HV and HH). Lacking one antenna radiation pattern might
affect interference calculation results.
On the Info tab:
Enter information such as gain, frequency band and operating frequency
minimum and maximum values
About the Feeders Window
This section describes the Feeders window which is shown here:
Feeders Window
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 7
Version 4.0
On the General tab:
In the Part ID box, enter the user-defined name of the selected feeder to a
maximum length of 32 characters
Click Photo to display a photograph of the component or to search for and
assign a photograph
The Created and Modified boxes are automatically written by ENTERPRISE
when a new feeder is created or modified
On the Costing tab:
Select one of the manufacturers from the list of suppliers that you have
entered
Add a unit cost for the feeder
On the Losses tab:
Specify the frequency band that the feeder is valid for
Specify the feeder loss per metre for the feeder valid for the frequency band
in the previous field
Specify the connector loss for the feeder
About the Cell Equipment Window
This section describes the Cell Equipment window which is shown here:
Cell Equipment Window
The tabs of the Cell Equipment window are described here.
On the General tab:
In the Part ID box, enter the user-defined name of the selected equipment to a
maximum length of 32 characters
Click Photo to display a photograph of the component or to search for and
assign a photograph
ENTERPRISE automatically writes the Created and Modified boxes when a
new piece of equipment is created or modified
3 8 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
On the Costing tab:
Select one of the manufacturers from the list of suppliers that you have
entered
Add a unit cost
On the Info tab:
Specify equipment loss (dB), which is the insertion loss for the component
On the Icon tab:
Choose a custom icon and click Apply or Commit to retain it
About the BTS Window
To keep track of different types of BTS equipment that might be in your database,
including different vendors and different equipment models from a particular
vendor, use the BTS window. The tabs of the BTS window are described below.
On the General tab:
In the Part ID box, enter the user-defined name of the selected equipment to a
maximum length of 32 characters
Click Photo to display a photograph of the BTS equipment or to search for
and assign a photograph
ENTERPRISE automatically writes the Created and Modified boxes when
BTS equipment is created or modified
On the Costing tab:
Select one of the manufacturers from the list of suppliers that you have
entered
Add a unit cost
On the Parameters tab:
Specify the maximum and minimum output power of the BTS equipment
Specify the Minimum carrier spacing allowed between carriers on the same
cell and adjacent cells
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 9
Version 4.0
About the Site Database Window
Use the Site Database window to change the attributes of all your network elements
within the ENTERPRISE database.
To access the Site Database window you can do one of the following:
From the Database menu, click Sites.
From the tool bar select .
When you first open the Site Database window, it looks similar to this:
Site Database Window
If you click the Info button to expand the window, you will see that the left hand
pane contains your network hierarchy and when you select an item in this pane,
information related to the item appears on the right-hand side of the window. The
information changes depending on your selection.
This illustration gives an example:
Site Database Window with Information Displayed for Selected Item
3 10 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
In the left-hand pane, which can be resized:
You can use the Filter box to ensure that the hierarchy displays filters.
Whatever is displayed are all the items, for example sites and cells, that are
present in the filter selected in the Filter box.
Items marked with an asterisk * indicate that changes have been applied to
this item but not committed. For information about applying and committing,
see Chapter 6.
You can display the hierarchy according to logical linking of equipment, physical
linking of equipment or physical linking of Properties by using the Site Database
Settings dialog box.
About the Buttons on the Site Database Window
This table describes the buttons on the expanded Site Database window:
Click To
Settings Change the settings for how the Site Database window displays your network
elements.
Info Show or hide the right hand side of the Site Database window.
Restore Remove a change that you have Applied and revert to using the master database
settings, getting the latest committed version of that object.
Remove only works if there is a version of the object already committed to the
database. If you have created a new object and want to remove it, you should delete
it.
Apply Apply a change you have made only to your own account, that is, the change can
only be seen by yourself.
Commit Copy your change to the database and therefore make it available to everyone.
Before using Commit, you need to have clicked Apply.
Commit All Copy all your changes to the database in one action, and therefore make them
available to everyone. Before using Commit All, you need to have clicked Apply for
each change you made.
Note : If there is nothing to Commit when you click Commit All, a dialog box will
appear telling you that there is nothing left to Commit.
Restore All Delete all changes that you have Applied and revert to using the master database
settings, getting the latest committed version of the items marked with an asterisk.
Note : If there is nothing to Restore when you click Restore All, a dialog box will
appear telling you that there is nothing left to Restore.
Global Edit Open the global editor, for when you want to change all sites identified by a filter.
Close To close the Site Database.
For more information about applying and committing your changes, see Chapter 6.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 11
Version 4.0
About the Site Database Settings Dialog Box
To change how the Site Database window displays network elements, click the
Settings button on the Site Database window. This dialog box appears:
Site Database Settings Dialog Box
In the Site Database Settings dialog box, you can choose which identifier is shown
next to various network elements in the Site Database window. You can also choose
whether the Site Database window displays information:
In a hierarchical list of MSCs and sites (Logical Links).
In a list of Properties, showing how each Property is physically linked
(Physical Links).
If you choose this view, you cannot cut paste and copy items in the Site
Database window.
In a list of Properties, showing the equipment at that location (Location)
In a network view showing 3g logical networks and nodes only
The ways in which you can view networks are shown here:
Example of Network Displayed with Logical Links, Physical Links, Location and Network views
For more information on Properties, see Chapter 6.
3 12 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Setting A Default Network
Once you have set the hierarchy in the Site Database, you can set a default network.
To do this:
1. Select the network you want to make as the default.
2. Click the right mouse button and select Set As Default Network. A plus sign
will appear to the left of the network name.
Opening the Site Database at a Particular Site
You can open the Site Database at a particular site. To do this:
1. Ensure you have the Site Database check box selected on the General tab of
the Preferences dialog box. For information on setting preferences, see
Chapter 2.
2. From the Map View window, select a site.
3. Hold down the Control key on your keyboard and click the site.
The Site Database appears with the chosen site selected.
4. Click Info>> to display information about this site.
Displaying Only Some Sites in the Site Database Window
In the Site Database window, by default a filter of All is displayed, meaning that
everything is shown in the tree pane. However, you can choose to show only certain
sites in the Site Database window by creating another filter and selecting it.
For information on creating filters, see Chapter 5.
To show selected sites that have been defined in a filter:
In the Filter box, click the required filter.
To show a specific installation:
1. Ensure the selected filter includes the required site. If in doubt, use the All
filter.
2. Type the site identifier in the Site Identity box.
When you have both a Map View window and the Site Database window open, you
can also select a site on the map and the Site Database window scrolls to select that
site automatically. For this to work, the filter that is selected must include the
selected site.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 13
Version 4.0
About the Context Sensitive Menus in the Site Database Window
In the Site Database window, you can access commonly used functions via context
sensitive menus, depending on:
The view you have chosen in the Site Database Settings dialog box. For
example, if you choose to display Logical Links, you cannot cut paste and
copy items in the Site Database window.
Which network element is selected in the left-hand pane
To access context sensitive menus, select a network element and click the right
mouse button on it. These tables show commands available on each context
sensitive menu:
PLMN
PLMN Command Which
Add MSC (only available
when displaying Logical
links)
Adds a new default MSC with the defaults defined in the site
templates. (if using 3g or ASSET). The co-ordinates will need to be
modified.
Paste MSC (only available
when displaying Logical
links)
Pastes the most recently copied MSC into the project with a new site
identity that is provided automatically. All the BSCs and BTSs
beneath the MSC will also be given new unique identities.
This option is only available if there is an MSC in the clipboard.
Add Property Adds a new default Property. You will have to modify the co-
ordinates.
This option is only shown if the Site Database window is displaying
the hierarchy by Location.
Delete Empty Properties Deletes any Properties that have no associated MSCs, BSCs or
sites.
This option is only shown if the Site Database window is displaying
the hierarchy by Location.
MSC
MSC Command Which
Add BSC Adds a new default BSC with the defaults defined in the site
templates
Paste BSC Pastes the most recently copied BSC into the project with a new site
identity that is provided automatically. All the BTSs beneath the BSC
will also be given new unique identities.
This option is only available if there is a BSC in the clipboard.
Copy MSC Copies the MSC and all its children to the clipboard.
Delete MSC Deletes the MSC to the wastebasket.
Apply Applies your change to the database but only you can see it.
Commit Commits your change to the database so others can see it.
Restore Removes any outstanding Applies for the selected MSC.
3 14 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
BSC
BSC Command Which
Add site Adds a new default BTS with the defaults defined in the site
templates. The co-ordinates default to the same as the parent and so
will need to be modified.
Add distribution node Adds a new default distribution node with the defaults defined in the
site templates. The co-ordinates will need to be modified.
Paste site / distribution
node
Pastes the most recently copied / cut site into the project with a new
site identity.
This option is only available if there is a site in the clipboard.
Copy BSC Copies the BSC and all its children to the clipboard.
Delete BSC Deletes the BSC to the wastebasket.
Cut BSC Cuts the BSC and all its children to the clipboard.
Apply Applies your change to the database but only you can see it.
Commit Commits your change to the database so others can see it.
Restore Removes any outstanding Applies for the selected BSC.
Site
Site Command Which
Add cell Adds a new cell with a default cell layer onto the site.
Paste cell Pastes the most recently copied / cut cell onto on the site. This
option is only available if there is a cell in the clipboard.
Copy site Copies the site and all its children to the clipboard.
Delete site Deletes the site to the wastebasket.
Cut site Cuts the site and all its children to the clipboard.
Apply Applies your change to the database but only you can see it.
Commit Commits your change to the database so others can see it.
Restore Removes any outstanding Applies for the selected Site.
Cell
Cell Command Which
Paste cell layer Pastes most recently copied / cut cell onto the site (Only available if there is a
cell layer in the clipboard).
Add cell layer This menu gives a list of all the available cell layers. Choosing one adds the cell
layer to the cell.
Copy cell Copies the cell and all its children to the clipboard.
Delete cell Deletes the cell to the wastebasket.
Cut cell Cuts the cell and all its children to the clipboard.
Add repeater Adds a default repeater to the current cell using the defaults defined in the site
templates.
Paste repeater Pastes the most recently copied / cut repeater onto the cell. This option is only
available if there is a repeater in the clipboard.
Apply Applies your change to the database but only you can see it.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 15
Version 4.0
Commit Commits your change to the database so others can see it.
Restore Removes any outstanding Applies for the selected cell.
Cell Layer
Cell Command Which
Copy cell layer Copies the cell layer to the clipboard.
Delete cell layer Deletes the cell layer to the wastebasket only if it has been
commited.
Cut cell layer Cuts the cell layer to the clipboard.
Apply Applies your change to the database but only you can see it.
Commit Commits your change to the database so others can see it.
Restore Removes any outstanding Applies for the selected cell layer.
Distribution Node
Command Which
Copy distribution node Copies the distribution node to the clipboard.
Delete distribution node Deletes the distribution node to the wastebasket.
Cut distribution node Cuts the distribution node to the clipboard.
Apply Applies your change to the database but only you can see it.
Commit Commits your change to the database so others can see it.
Restore Removes any outstanding Applies for the selected distribution node.
Repeaters
Command Which
Copy repeater Copies the repeater to the clipboard.
Delete repeater Deletes the repeater to the wastebasket.
Cut repeater Cuts the repeater to the clipboard.
Apply Applies your change to the database but only you can see it.
Commit Commits your change to the database so others can see it.
Restore Removes any outstanding Applies for the selected repeater.
About the ENTERPRISE Map View Window
The Map View window is a fundamental part of the ENTERPRISE suite in which
you can view the different data sets available within ENTERPRISE including site
data, connectivity and mapping data.
The Map View window and Site Database window are fully synchronised so that
changes you make in one are reflected in the other. Similarly, when you click
something in the map, any open Site Database window will update dynamically to
display the selected network element.
3 16 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
This picture shows an example of the Map View window:
Example Map View window
To open a Map View window:
Click the Open Map View window button .
For detailed information on using the map view window, see Chapter 4 of this
manual.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 17
Version 4.0
About the Map View Toolbar
This toolbar is always shown on the Map View window, regardless of which
products you have installed with the ENTERPRISE suite:
Zoom in
and out
Pan
Open 3D
Map View
Search
Key/Legend
Show Data
Types For
Display
Favourite
Views
Print
Legend
Page
Setup Print
Print Preview
Print Defined
Area
Select
Depending on the products you have installed, you may also get the site design
toolbar.
About the Site Design Toolbars
This picture shows a typical Site Design toolbar:
Site visibility
Add Neighbour
Add Property
Move Property
Delete Property
Make Candidate
Break Candidate
Display Candidates
Delete network element
Add Exception
Display Neighbour
Display Exceptions
Search Site/Property Area
Make Link
toolbox
Add Point to Multi-point Hub
Break Link
toolbox
Move Point to Multi-point Hub
Delete Point to Multi-point Hub
Add Network Element toolbox
Move Network Element toolbox
3 18 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
The Add Network Element toolbox contains the following buttons:
Add Site
Add BSC
Add MSC
Add Repeater
Add Distribution
Node
Add Logical Node
The Move Network Element toolbox contains the following buttons:
Move Network Element Move Antenna
Re-Orientate Antenna
The Make Link toolbox contains the following buttons:
Add Logical
Connection
Add Logical Cellular
Connection
Make Point to Multi-point
Link
Make Point to
Point Link
The Break Link toolbox contains the following buttons:
Break
Connection
Remove Logical
Connection
Any additional toolbars shown are related to the products you have installed so for
information on these, see the relevant User Reference Guide.
About the ENTERPRISE Map Information Window
To get information about a particular point on the map, you can display the Map
Information window, either attached to the bottom of a Map View window or
detached from it. When there is no open Map View window, the Map Information
window is automatically closed.
The Map Information window displays the dimensions of the current view
expressed as width first then height, in kilometres. As you move the mouse cursor
over the map, the Map Information window displays information related to the
specific pixel under the cursor including location, height above sea level, the clutter
category building height and nearest cell.
Map Information Window
For more information about the Map Information window, see Chapter 4.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 19
Version 4.0
About the 3D Map View Window
As well as the usual two-dimensional Map View window, ENTERPRISE contains a
3D Map View window to enable you to more easily view your map data,
particularly information on:
Line of sight between linkends
Clutter and terrain height
The 3D Map View displays items that are shown in the ordinary (2D) Map View
window, only three-dimensionally.
Tip : The 3D Map View has a black background so you may want to change the
colour of anything you have defined as black in order to view it in the 3D Map
View.
To open the 3D Map View:
1. Ensure that you are displaying in the Map View window, the items that you
want to see in the 3D Map View window.
2. On the Map View window toolbar, click the 3D button .
The 3D Map View appears showing the same items as you are currently
displaying on the Map View window.
This picture shows an example of the 3D Map View window:
Example 3D Map View window
3 20 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About the 3D Map View Window Toolbar
Use the 3D Map Window toolbar for:
Zooming in and out
Changing the view shown
Setting the display properties
Printing displays
This picture shows the 3D Map View window toolbar:
Zoom in
Zoom out
Solid view Wireframe view
Print display
Settings
3D Map View Window Toolbar
About the Message Log Window
The Message Log window opens automatically when a project is started and
contains messages and warnings:
Message Log
If any of the mapping directories are set incorrectly, the product cannot display that
information. To rectify this it is necessary to close the project and change the
relevant directory before re-opening the project.
This table shows the types of messages you might see:
Type of Message For Example
Confirmation messages You have opened a project
Ready message Login has been completed
Messages relating to files Incomplete map data
Warnings Failure to commit something to the database
Out of sequence tasks Committing a site which uses equipment which has not itself been
committed
Permission warning You do not have permission to perform the requested task
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 21
Version 4.0
About the Licence Manager Window
Use the Licence Manager to request licences.
The Licence Manager window shows a list of modules that can be licensed and their
status. If a module is not licensed then you can click Get Licence to try to gain the
licence. If a module is licensed then the licence can be revoked by clicking the Drop
Licence button.
Note : You cannot drop the ENTERPRISE licence, only the individual product
licences within the ENTERPRISE suite.
Licences are stored on a hardware dongle attached either to the back of the PC or a
network server. If the licensing hardware becomes disconnected for any reason, the
Licence Manager will inform you that you have lost the required licence(s). If this
happens, the licensing hardware should be checked, reconnected and the licence re-
requested using the Licence Manager.
For more information about licensing, see the ENTERPRISE Installation and
Administration Guide.
Troubleshooting Licence Monitoring
If you start ENTERPRISE and there is a problem with licensing, a dialog box similar
to this one appears:
Example Dialog Box Showing Licence Failure
3 22 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
This table describes what you should do to fix possible licensing problems:
Message Shown In Licence Check dialog
box
Solution
No HASP Driver found Install the HASP driver by repairing the install. To do
this:
1. From the Control Panel, double-click Add/Remove
Programs.
2. Select ENTERPRISE 3.4 and click the Add/Remove
button.
3. Select the Repair option.
Local HASP not found If you were expecting to use a local dongle, ensure you
have connected it securely to the parallel printer port of
your PC.
Time Limit Expired Contact AIRCOM International for a new licence.
Cannot connect to license server Open the nethasp.ini file and edit the IP address against
the NM_SERVER_ADDR option to point to the license
server. By default this is configured as 127.0.0.1
Note that the DNS name may alternatively be entered if
your network uses dynamic IP assignment.
Application's concurrent user limit has
been exceeded
You need to buy further licences. Contact your system
administrator or AIRCOM International.
About the Wastebasket
When you delete elements, they move to the Wastebasket. These elements have been
deleted only from your private area of the database, so other users will still be able
to work on the "deleted" item.
To access the Wastebasket:
From the Edit menu, click Wastebasket or click the appropriate button
on the toolbar.
This picture shows an example of the Wastebasket:
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 3 23
Version 4

Version 4.0
affect other users, you need to remove the item from the Wastebasket. Take care not
to remove anything that someone might need as you cannot recover items deleted
from the Wastebasket.
Note : You cannot create a new item with the same name as something in the
wastebasket, even if it is in someone else's wastebasket. A warning message
appears. Therefore, to keep these problems to a minimum you may want to delete
an item permanently.
Restoring Deleted Items
Use the Wastebasket to restore deleted items to the database. You can only restore
deleted items if the objects on which they depend are still in use or have been
restored first. For example, to restore BSC1 that belongs to MSC1, first restore MSC1.
You can restore items such as physical elements of the network, cell layers and
carrier layers, cell and site equipment, terminal types and links.
To restore a deleted item:
1. From the Edit menu, click Wastebasket.
2. Select the item you want to restore then click Restore.
Your item is restored in the state that it was in when you deleted it, including
its committal status.
Deleting Items from the Wastebasket
You cannot create a new item with the same name as something in the wastebasket.
Therefore, you may want to delete an item permanently. However, take care
because deleting items from the Wastebasket affects all users, because this item will
no longer be present in the database.
To do this:
1. From the Edit menu, click Wastebasket.
2. Select the item you want to delete permanently then click Delete.
When other users next reload the project, they will notice the changes.
Tip : You can also delete the entire contents of the wastebasket by clicking the
Empty button.

3 24 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 1
Version 4.0
4 Viewing and Editing Data
About the Map View Window
The Map View window is a fundamental part of the ENTERPRISE suite in which
you can view the different data sets available within ENTERPRISE including site
data, connectivity and mapping data.
As with all windows, the Map View window and Site Database window are
synchronised so that changes you make in one are reflected in the other. For
example, when you click something in the map, the Site Database window updates
dynamically. You can have more than one Map View window open to view
different areas of the network.
To open a Map View window:
On the main toolbar, click the Open Map View window button .
or
From the View menu, click 2D View.
A blank Map View window opens.
This chapter describes the following topics:
Adding and editing objects in the Map View window
About the different data types
Controlling the display
Searching the map
Using the Height Profile window
About the Master View window
About The Logical Connection Viewer
Printing
4 2 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Adding and Editing Objects in the Map View Window
This section is applicable to ASSET, CONNECT and TARGET.
You can add network elements by using:
The Site Design toolbar in the Map View window
The Site Database window
This section describes how to use the tools on the Site Design toolbar that are
common to more than one product. Further buttons that are added by individual
products are described in the appropriate User Reference Guide.
Adding Properties
In the Map View window, you can position different pieces of cellular equipment on
the same location called a Property. A Property is a technology-independent real
estate location whereas a site refers to the technology/equipment that is located at
the Property on which it is parented.
You can add, delete and move Properties in the Map View window. For more
information about Properties, see Chapter 5.
To add a new Property to the current Map View window:
1. Click the Add Property button .
2. Click in the map at the desired location for the Property.
The Property is automatically added and applied to the site database but not
committed.
Tip : When you have selected the location of the new Property, press Escape
to return to the Select mode.
About Logical Networks
You can create a hierachy of Logical Network elements and you are able to define
the attributes for each.
The following diagram shows an example of a logical network:
Logical Network
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 3
Version 4.0
Creating A Logical Network
To create a Logical Network:
1. In the Site Database, click Settings.
2. From the Display Hierarchy pane, select Network View and click OK.
3. In the Site Database, click the right mouse button on All Networks and from
the menu that appears, click Add PLMN Network. A PLMN will appear in
the list.
4. On the PLMN you have just created, click the right mouse button and from
the menu that appears, click Add Logical Network. A Logical Network will
appear in the list. Repeat this if you require more Logical Networks.
5. Click the right mouse button on a Logical Network and from the menu that
appears, click Add Logical Node. A Logical Node will appear in the list.
Repeat this if you require more Logical Nodes.
You can apply the parameters to the Network individually on the tabs in the
Site Database.
Adding Logical Nodes To The Map View Window
To add a new Logical Node to the current Map View window:
1. In the Site Database, ensure that the network you wish to add nodes to is
selected as the default. For more information on this, see Chapter 3.
2. Click the down arrow on the Add Network Element toolbox, and then click
the Add Logical Node button .
3. In the Map View Window click on the desired location of the Logical Node.
Adding MSCs and BSCs
Before you start adding MSCs and BSCs, it is helpful to specify parameters for all
new network elements that you will be adding. Do this in the in the Site Templates
window.
Adding MSCs
To add a new MSC to the current Map View window:
1. Click the down arrow on the Add Network Element toolbox, and then click
the Add MSC button .
If this button is unavailable, you may need to contact your administrator and
get your permissions changed.
2. Click in the map at the desired location of the MSC.
If the location is not on an existing Property, a new Property is added
automatically together with the MSC. You will only see them if you have
selected to do so in the display properties of the site filter.
4 4 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
The MSC is automatically added to the site database but not applied or
committed.
Adding BSCs
Adding BSCs is not applicable to AMPS/TDMA networks.
To add a new BSC to the current Map View window:
1. Ensure you have an MSC already added, otherwise you cannot add a BSC.
2. Click the down arrow on the Add Network Element toolbox, and then click
the Add BSC button .
3. Click in the map at the desired location of the BSC.
The BSC is:
Automatically applied to the database.
Assigned to the geographically closest MSC in the network. However if
you add a closer MSC at a later stage, the BSCs will remain assigned to the
original MSC.
Either added onto an existing Property or a new Property is created
automatically at the location of the new BSC.
Adding Sites
To add a new site to the map:
1. Ensure you have already added an MSC and a BSC (if applicable to the
network type), otherwise you cannot add a site.
Tip : If using certain products, for example ASSET or 3g, you can choose to
specify parameters for all new sites in the Site Templates window.
2. Click the down arrow on the Add Network Element toolbox, and then click
the Add Site button .
3. Click in the map at the required location for the new site. If this is not on an
existing Property, a new Property is created as you add the site.
Tip : When you have selected the location(s) of the new site(s), press Escape
to return to the Select mode.
A site is:
Created with any defaults that are defined in the Site Templates window
(if you are using ASSET or 3g). If not applicable, or Template settings have
not been defined, each time a new site is added, you will need to assign
parameters and apply them in the site database.
Named in accordance with defined base string settings.
Applied to the site database but not committed.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 5
Version 4.0
Part of the All filter and any dynamic filters that you have set up.
Therefore, if you have a different filter displayed in the Map View
window, in the List of Data Types, under Filters, select All then Redraw
the map to see the new site.
If a new site is added in the Map View window, it will be automatically linked to the
nearest element chosen on the Network tab of the Preferences dialog box. If there are
several of that element at the same location, a menu appears, allowing you to select
the required one.
Adding Distribution Nodes
To create a new distribution node (not applicable in AMPS):
1. Decide whether you want to specify parameters for all new distribution
nodes. If so, define them in the Site Templates window.
2. Click the down arrow on the Add Network Element toolbox, and then click
the Add Distribution Node button .
3. Click in the map at the desired location.
The distribution node and its location are automatically added and applied to
the site database but not committed.
If a new distribution node is added in this way it will be automatically linked to the
nearest BSC. If there are several BSCs at that location then a menu will appear from
which you can select the correct BSC.
You can also add distribution nodes directly from the site database or create
individual filters for distribution nodes.
Deleting and Moving Objects
Deleting Objects
To delete objects from the Map View window:
Click the Delete Property button to delete a Property or the Delete button
to delete any other network element, then click the object you want to
delete.
A message asks you whether you are sure you want to delete this object. If
you click Yes to delete, the deleted item is sent to the Wastebasket from where
it can be restored or deleted from the master database.
Important : If you delete a Property, everything on the Property is deleted.
Tip : If you make a mistake, and wish to restore items, use the Wastebasket.
4 6 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Moving Objects
To move a Property (or all the network elements on a Property):
Click the Move Property button and click the required location.
To move MSCs, sites, BTS, repeaters and distribution nodes in the Map View
window:
1. Ensure that in the site filter that you have selected, you have chosen a symbol
and colour for Properties on the Property tab. When Properties are displayed
on the map, it is easier to move items on to them.
2. Click the down arrow on the Move Network Element toolbox, and then click
the Move Network Element button .
3. Click the desired network element, for example a site.
Where more than one element is in the same location, you can select the
required item from the list that appears.
4. Click the new location. The new location must be a Property. You cannot
move network elements to a blank area of the map.
Tip : If you want to move a Property and all its network elements, use the
Move Property button.
The element is moved and this is reflected in the site database.
5. Commit the change or restore the last committed settings.
Making Network Connections
The All Sites filter exists by default and when selected, displays all the site and
connection information in the database. If you have created another filter for display
in the Map View window, ensure it contains network connections so you can see
what you are doing on the map.
To specify network connections between Properties, MSCs, BSCs and cell sites:
1. Click the Show Data Types button, expand Filters and ensure that All is
selected. For example:
2. Click in the 2D Map View.
3. Click the down arrow on the Make Link tool box and then click the type of
connection you want to make.
4. Click a transmitter site for the link.
Tip : If you are making connections between cell sites, click in the middle of
the site.
5. Click a receiver site for the link.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 7
Version 4.0
A bi-directional network link is drawn between the two selected sites. The
network connections are automatically stored and applied in the database.
Commit them when you have made all of your connection as required.
6. To confirm that the link has been created, from the Database menu, click
Links and ensure the new link number and relevant site codes are shown.
Note : This feature does not re-parent sites onto different BSCs or MSCs. This re-
parenting must be performed as a separate operation in the Site Database window.
When a new site is created, it is automatically connected to the nearest BSC or
distribution node, depending on what you specified in the Preferences dialog box.
Tip : CONNECT is the recommended tool for advanced link planning.
Breaking Network Connections
The All Sites filter exists by default and when selected, this displays all the sites
connection information in the database. If you have selected another filter, ensure
you can see network connections.
To break an existing network connection between transmitter and receiver sites:
1. Ensure than network connections are displayed.
2. Click the down arrow on the Break Link toolbox, and then click the type of
connection you want to break.
3. Click the network connection that you want to break (you only have to click
the link not the sites).
The link is moved to the Wastebasket.
Note : This feature does not re-parent sites onto different BSCs or MSCs. This
re-parenting must be performed as a separate operation in the Site Database
window. When a site is re-parented, a link is automatically created. When a
new site is created, it is automatically connected to the nearest BSC or
distribution node, depending on what you specified in the Preferences dialog
box.
4 8 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Adding A Logical Connection
Logical Connections are used to connect Logical Nodes. For each traffic definition
on a node it is possible to specify a Logical Connection that will determine its
destination. You can also add traffic directly onto the Logical Connection using the
Logical Connection Viewer or the Traffic tab in the Site Database.
To add a Logical Connection:
1. Ensure you have the Filters option selected on the Show Data Types.
2. Click the down arrow on the Make Link tool box, and then click the Logical
Connection button .
3. Click a transmitter logical node for the connection.
Tip : If you are making connections between cell sites, click in the middle of
the site.
4. Click a receiver logical node for the connection.
A bi-directional network link is drawn between the two selected sites. The
network connections are automatically stored and applied in the database.
Commit them when you have created all the logical connections required.
To confirm that the connection has been created, from the Database menu, click
Logical Connections.
Displaying a Search Area around a Property
To draw a circle around a particular Property or site:
1. Click the Site/Property Search Area button .
2. Click the desired site or Property and drag to create a search area of the
required size.
Tip : If you select the wrong Property or site, press Escape on your keyboard
to select a different Property or site.
The corresponding search area is displayed and this is automatically
refreshed if you move the Property to a new location.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 9
Version 4.0
3. To resize the search area, click the Property, then click the Site/Property
Search Area button again and draw the search area again.
The radius you have defined is stored in the Site Database where you can
change it if required. For more information on this, see Chapter 6.
You can use a search area to mark Properties as nominals and candidates. For
more information on using nominals and candidates, see Chapter 5.
About Displaying Data on the Map
This section describes the following topics:
About the different data types
Changing clutter resolution
Viewing data types on the map
Changing how something is displayed
Searching the map
About the Different Data Types
This table describes some of the different types of data that you can view on the
map:
Item Description
Standard
Vectors and
Standard
Polygons
The specific categories of line data available depend on the map data
used. Will typically include classes such as Roads, Railways, Coast and
National Boundaries.
You can change the colour, style and width of the selected vector. To do
this, double click the item in the list.
You can define subcategories of line data.
Text The specific categories of textual data available depends on the map data
used but would typically include classes such as Roads, City Names, Town
Names and Country Names.
You can change the font, size, style, colour and background of the text. To
do this, double click the item in the list.
Height Data The list of possible pixel sizes will depend on the map data used. If only
one resolution is available this field cannot be changed. By double-clicking
Height Data, you can change minimum height value, start colour, height
step interval, zero height colour, and map pixel resolution.
Clutter Data The individual categories of clutter available will depend on the map data
used but would typically include classes such as Urbanised, Industrial,
Open Areas, Water and Vegetation.
You can select the All Clutter category to automatically select everything
under clutter and display it on the map.
To change the colour of a clutter category, double click the item in the list.
You can also change the map pixel resolution used.
Note : The clutter settings also affect the height profile window.
Map Backdrops You can select whether to display maps and aerial photographs as is or
converted to grey scale.
4 10 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Building Heights
and Vectors
If you have building data in your ENTERPRISE installation, building heights
are configured in the same way as DTM Height Data and building vectors
are configured in the same way as Line Data.
You can define subcategories of building vector data.
Map Grid You can choose an automatic or manual grid type and customise its colour,
fonts, line attributes and also whether it is based upon a rectangular grid or
geographic co-ordinate system.
Filters The All filter, which exists by default, displays all the sites, nodes and so on
in the database. Any additional filters that you create will also be shown in
this list.
Cell Info The All Cell Info type exists by default and when selected displays all the
cell information for all sites in the database. You can create other cell info
filters from the Site Database window.
For more information on changing how this is displayed, see below.
Changing Clutter Resolution
You may want to change the resolution of the clutter displayed, because it is
pixelated. To change the resolution of all your clutter:
1. Double click any clutter type.
2. In the Resolution box, choose the appropriate resolution.
Viewing Data Types on the Map
To see what available data types can be displayed on a map:
In the Map View window, click the Show Data Types button .
or
Use the Data Types tab of the Map Information and Control dialog box
The different categories of data configured for use with ENTERPRISE are
shown. These include vectors, text, backdrops, height data, clutter data, site
filters, cell information, network connections and coverage.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 11
Version 4.0
List of Data Types
Tip : Before you display anything else, display some standard line data, such as
coastline, then zoom to the area you are interested in. This will ensure you do not
slow down your PC by trying to display rasterized data, such as heights and clutter
data, for whole areas that you are not interested in.
To expand a category and see the data types beneath it:
Click the + sign.
To display a data type on the map:
Ensure you have selected the check box next to the type.
Selecting Data Types
For Polygons and Vectors, Building Vectors and Clutter, you can select a category or
sub-category and all items within that category are automatically selected and will
be displayed. Similarly, clearing the check box for the whole category, will mean all
items are un-selected:
To add categories to polygons and vector data, and sort the items within them, use
the Vector Editor. For information on using the Vector Editor, see Chapter 5.
Tip : You can also change which data types are displayed by using the Data Types
tab of the Map Information and Control dialog box:
4 12 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Changing How Items Are Displayed on the Map
This section describes how you can change the display of items on the Map View
window.
To change the display properties of any item:
1. In the list of data types, double-click the required item to open the Display
Properties dialog box.
2. Change the attributes as required. The different attributes shown will depend
on the item you have selected.
Changing How Network Elements are Displayed
To change the way network elements are displayed on the map:
1. In the list of data types, double-click the site filter you want to change, for
example the All filter.
The display properties dialog box for the selected filter opens. This picture
shows an example
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 13
Version 4.0
2. To select the property that you wish to edit, expand the appropriate network
element by clicking the + sign, and then click the required property.
This table shows the properties you can edit for each network element in All
filter:
For This Network Element You Can Edit These Properties
WMSC, MSC, Distribution Node,
GSM Cell, BSC, RNC, SGSN,
AMPS Cell, Hub, Node B and
Logical Nodes
Size, Symbol, Text
Network Connection BTS Route, Background, Interference, Capacity,
Colour, Frequencies, Options
Cellular Connection, Logical
Connection
Line Colour
UMTS Cell Hexagon Symbol, Size, Symbol
Property Property Size, Background, Font, Symbol, Text
Repeater, Cell Site Hexagon Symbol, Size, Symbol, Text
Note : Size refers to the minimum and maximum size of the symbols. This is
expressed as a percentage of the screen width and draws the symbols in the
correct ratio. This picture shows an example:
4 14 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
3. If on the Symbol tab for a network element, you choose a style of Sector, it
will change direction to reflect the antenna azimuth of each cell and display
the antenna's horizontal 3dB beam width. If you choose Arrow, it will change
direction to reflect the antenna azimuth of each cell.
When you choose a Fill type other than (none), you can then click the Fill
page:
Fill page
Choose a fill type
for the Fill page
to become
available
Note : If you select a style of Arrow, the type of fill you select only has
significance when the antenna is omni-directional and the site has one cell, in
which case it will be a filled circle.
4. In the map, click with the right mouse button and from the menu that
appears, click Redraw to see your changes on the map.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 15
Version 4.0
Changing Display Properties for an Individual Network Element
To change how a particular network element is displayed:
1. In the Site Database window, select the required site.
2. On the Misc tab, click the Set Site Display Properties button.
3. On the tab containing the information you wish to change, select the Click to
Override Filter Draw Method check box, and then choose the displayed
attributes that you require for that site.
4. Click Apply then click Close.
When you display sites in the Map View window, this site will appear
differently to the other sites in the filter.
Changing How Vectors and Polygons are Displayed
There are a number of ways you can change the display properties of a vector or
polygon, whether it is from map data, such as coastline, or one you have created
yourself using the Vector Editor.
As for other items, to change how a vector or polygon is displayed in the Map View
window:
1. In the list of data types, select the required item and double-click it.
The display properties dialog box appears.
2. On the Style tab, choose the colour, the style and width (in points) of the line
of the vector, or outline if it is a polygon.
4 16 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Changing How Cell Info is Displayed
To change how all the cell information for all sites in the database is displayed:
In the list of data types, under Cell Info, double-click All Cell Info.
A dialog box similar to this one appears:
As well as customising what is displayed (for example for GSM: TCH, BCCH, BSIC,
LAC, MNC and NCC), colour and font, you can select a specific cell, range of
carriers, or group.
To specify what is included in All Cell Info:
1. On the Carriers/Cells tab, choose to display some or all cells, carriers or
groups.
If you choose cells, you can also display their interferers.
If you choose carriers, you can specify layers and particular carriers for
that layer. (Each carrier layer setting is remembered).
If you choose groups, you can specify layers and group(s) for that layer.
(Each carrier layer setting is remembered).
An asterisk (*) acts as a wildcard.
2. On the Cell Parameters tab, you can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard or search
for specific values. Then choose from All fields match (AND) and Any Fields
Match (OR) to select which cell data is displayed.
For example, if you enter 50 into the BCCH field, 31 into the TCH field and
then select All Fields Match, only cells with both BCCH=50 and TCH=31 will
have text data displayed. But if you select Any Fields Match, all cells that
match either criterion will have these attributes displayed.
3. On the Colours tab, select each item in the list box, for example Matching
Group [Traffic] and choose the colour you want for it; ensure you select a
draw method, for example Text; and a size (%).
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 17
Version 4.0
This picture shows various items displayed on the map:
Sector symbol
coloured
according to
Frequency Group
Matching Group
(Control)
Matching Carrier
(Control)
Cell ID
Various Items From All Cell Info Displayed on the Map
Example of Displaying BSICs
To display BSICs:
1. In the list of data types, under Cell Info, double-click All Cell Info.
2. Select a method of searching items.
Choose Cell Identity and enter a specific cell ID (for example Site0A) to
display data for only that cell. This works for one cell at a time no multiple
cell Ids or wildcards work with this method.
or
Choose Carrier(s) to specify ranges of carriers or wildcards.
3. On the Cell Parameters tab, you can place further constraints on the items
you want to display. By specifying values in the boxes, you can filter out
elements that do not match the fields.
4. Specify the information that we wish to display for those sites still present on
the Colour tab. Select the required item from the drop down list, choose a
colour for it, and the way in which it will be displayed by selecting the
appropriate boxes across the bottom of the window.
5. If you have chosen Text, then on the Font page, choose a font that will be
used to display the textual information in the Map View window.
6. Click OK and redraw the Map View to see the requested data.
4 18 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Displaying Coverage for Specific Carriers
To display coverage for specific carriers that exist in a frequency plan that you have
created:
1. In the Map View window, in the list of data types, under Cell Info, double-
click Freq Re-Use.
This enables you to display cell service areas coloured according to the
carriers in use on that cell.
2. Hold down the CTRL key and select the carrier numbers whose coverage you
want to display in the Map View window.
3. Select a colour for the first carrier. The next selected carrier will use the next
colour in the palette, and so on.
For example, the following picture shows the selection of carriers 1, 2, 5 and 7
and a yellowy colour has been chosen. This colour will be used for the first
carrier (1) and the following carriers (2, 5 and 7) will be displayed as
increasingly dark shades of yellow, as they continue by using the next colours
in the palette.
This picture shows an example of some carriers displayed on the Map View:
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 19
Version 4.0
Controlling the Display
This section describes the ways in which you can customise the display in the Map
View window. For information on the Map View toolbar, see the ASSET User
Reference Guide.
Selecting Items on the Map
To select items in the Map View window, click the select button . This is selected
by default. If you have performed another function, for example, moving sites, you
may need to click the Select button to return to select mode.
Ordering the Data Shown on the Map
If you have many items displayed simultaneously on the Map View window, you
may want to manage the order in which they are displayed, so that one thing is not
hidden by another.
To select the order in which the selected data types are displayed:
1. Click the Key/Legend button .
2. In the Map Information and Control dialog box that appears, click the Layer
Order tab.
This tab shows the currently selected data types in the order they are
displayed on the map, with the highest item in the list being the last one to be
displayed on the map.
Tip : To select more data types for display, use the Data Types tab of this
dialog box.
3. To move a data type up or down in the order, select the required layer and
click the up or down arrow buttons as required then click Redraw to
automatically redraw the Map View window with your changes.
4. To delete data layers, select the data layer(s) that you want to delete, then
click the Remove Selected button. You can also click Remove All. Both these
buttons are the equivalent of clearing the checkboxes in the list of data types.
Double-clicking an item on the Layer Order tab brings up the display
properties dialog box in which you can change how items are displayed in
the usual way. For information on this, see page 4-12.
You can also use the Map Information and Control dialog box for:
Displaying and changing items in the legend
Selecting data types for display. For information on this, see page 4-10.
4 20 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Displaying and Changing Legend Information
The Legend tab shows information such as the display symbols and relevant key
strings which can be changed as well as all the colours and values assigned to the
data types that are currently displayed in the open Map View window. You can edit
display properties here for printing, but these changes are not preserved.
An example Legend tab is shown below:
Legend tab
To edit colours and other display properties permanently:
Double-click the required item either on the Data Types tab of this dialog box
or in the list of data types.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 21
Version 4.0
Zooming In and Out on the Map
There are three ways of zooming in on the map.
Magnifying by Two
Use the zoom in and zoom out buttons to magnify or shrink the current
display in the Map View window by a factor of two.
Selecting an Area to Zoom on
To select an area to zoom in or out on:
1. Click the right mouse button on the Map View window, and click Mouse
Zoom.
2. Click and hold down the left mouse button on the map where you want the
upper left of your area to be and drag the mouse towards the lower right area
to create a rectangle.
3. Release the mouse button and the Map View window redraws to display only
the area selected.
The aspect ratio of the region will match that of the current map view.
Zooming to a Set Factor
To zoom to a set multiplication factor, to a set window width in kilometres, to the
previous view or to the defined home view:
Click the right mouse button on the Map View window, and point to Menu
Zoom then click the required zoom.
Repositioning the Map
To reposition the displayed data:
1. Click the Pan button .
The cursor changes to a hand shape.
2. Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the data to the required
location.
3. You can continue to drag until you are happy with the displayed data.
4. To cancel the panning function, click another toolbar button.
Redrawing the Map
To redraw or refresh the information shown in the Map View window, for example
when you have many new things to the display:
In the Map View window, click the right mouse button and select Redraw.
4 22 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Displaying Line of Sight Visibility
Site visibility predictions are useful:
For identifying possible connection points into the transmission network for
new sites
In assisting you when you are doing a frequency plan
You can display as many site visibilities as you want on the map view.This picture
shows an example:
Displaying Site Visibility in the Map View window
This table shows the two ways in which you can predict site visibility:
Prediction Description
Line of Sight Displays all areas within the defined calculation area, which have been
calculated to have a clear line of sight to the selected site.
Line Of Sight is a necessity when planning microwave transmission
links. In locations where LOS is not possible, you would need to resort
to different transmission media, for example satellite or fibre link.
Fresnel zone
clearance
When microwave planning, it is not just line of sight that is important,
but whether you have clearance in the zone around it, the Fresnel
Zone.
This prediction displays all areas within the defined calculation area
but uses user-defined clearance rules for the calculation instead of
straightforward line of sight.
Note : You can only use this type of site visibility if you have
CONNECT installed
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 23
Version 4.0
To display the Line of Sight visibility of a Property:
1. In the Map View window, click the site visibility tool .
2. Select the site visibility settings. This table describes the settings available:
Setting Description
K Factor This geoclimatic factor is used to calculate the effective earth
radius.
Tip : The usual geoclimatic factor is 1.3333333.
Start Antenna Height (m) The height of the 1
st
antenna
End Antenna Height (m) The height of the 2
nd
antenna
Fresnel Clearance (0-1.0) The Fresnel clearance required. Valid values are real
numbers between 0.0 and 1.0 with a 'good' value being the
default of 0.6, although if planning at higher frequencies, (over
36 GHz ) use 1.0.
Note : This option is only available if you have CONNECT
installed
Frequency (GHz) The frequency you want to use for the visibility calculation
Use Clutter/Building
Raster/Building Vector
Heights
Select the height option(s), if any, that you want to include in
the visibility calculation. If you select to use Clutter Heights,
you must also specify a propagation model.
Important : The Building Vector calculation is highly detailed
and can take some time to run. It should only really be used
for detailed visibilities with a small radius (of less than half a
kilometre)
Visibility Area (Degrees) The extent of the visibility area that will be calculated. 360
degrees represents a full circle around the property or site,
180 degrees a half circle and so on.
Preset Radius (Kms) You can choose the radius of the area to be checked for
visibility. .
Note : It is suggested that
e
k (k value exceeded for 99.9% of the time) is used
with between 0 and 100 percent first Fresnel clearance, depending on the
frequency, geographical area and atmospheric climate. Also you can restrict
the area of interest to particular angles, therefore reducing the calculation
time required and the amount of information shown in the Map View
window.
3. Click the desired Property or site.
Tip : If you select the wrong site, press Escape on your keyboard to select a
different Property or site.
4. Drag the cursor outwards and click to specify the required radius.
Note : If you have already defined a Preset Radius in the site visibility
settings, you do not need to do this. The radius will be displayed
automatically.
5. If you have used a Visibility Area and a Preset Radius of less than 360
degrees, click the site or property and angle the visibility area as required.
4 24 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
6. From the menu that appears, select the mapping resolution to be used in the
calculation.
Note : This option is only available if more than one resolution is available.
Remember that a low-resolution setting will be calculated in less time but will
also be less accurate. The visibility of site is shown in black by default.
For example, here the site visibility is good towards the coast, but poor
towards the hills:
Once site visibility has been created, it will automatically be refreshed using
the existing settings, if the site is moved to a new location.
7. As with all items, you can change the display properties and antenna height
settings of site visibility sites, by selecting the item required under Site
Visibility in the list of data types.
Changing Antenna Height Settings Used in the Site Visibility
Calculation
To change the antenna height settings used in the site visibility calculation:
1. In the Map View window, click the Show Data Types button .
2. Under Site Visibility, double-click the site.
3. Ensure the Use Settings as Default check box is not selected.
4. Enter the new antenna heights and click OK.
5. The Effective Earth Radius is dependent on the k-factor and the true Earth
radius that can be changed in the Preferences dialog box.
6. Click anywhere on the map to recalculate using the new heights.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 25
Version 4.0
Saving a Map View
You can save a map view as a favourite. This means you can easily restore a
predefined working environment which includes the screen position of the Map
View on your desktop, display attributes and coverage, interference and traffic
arrays, the resolution of height, building heights and clutter arrays. You can also
store and share your favourites among other users.
To save a favourite map view:
1. In the Map View window, click the right mouse button and from the menu
that appears, click Add to Favourites.
2. Type a name for the favourite and choose what optional information to store
with it.
Tip : If you have run any coverage or interference arrays, or traffic rasters,
you can save them all now by selecting the appropriate checkbox(es) here.
3. The favourite is stored in the folder you have defined on the User Data
Directories tab of the Modify Project dialog box.
To access a favourite view:
Select the name of the view on the toolbar:
Editing Favourites
To delete and rename a saved favourite:
1. Click with the right mouse button in the Map View window.
2. Select Edit Favourites.
3. From the menu that appears, select the favourite you wish to rename or
delete.
Setting a Favourite Level of Zoom
You can set a level of zoom as your Home then return to it. To do this:
1. In the Map View window, click with the right mouse button and click Set
Home.
2. To return to this level of zoom, click with the right mouse button and select
Mouse Zoom, then click Home.
Tip : You can update, remove or rename your favourites by clicking the right mouse
button in the Map View window and clicking Edit Favourites.
4 26 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Searching the Map
You can search the map for different items such as location, Property, link or text.
This table describes the methods:
This Method Enables You To
Location Centre the map view based on geographic co-ordinates specified in either
long-lat, decimal long-lat or grid format.
Site Zoom to sites with certain site identifiers or particular site names.
Property Zoom to Properties with certain identifiers or particular names.
Link Zoom to links with certain link identifiers or particular names.
Where results are shown, they also show the two Properties that the link
connects. The Map View centres on the midpoint of the selected link (where
applicable) and displays an 'X' (to mark the spot).
Text Search for any textual items present in the available map data set (e.g. town
names, city names).
You can select Displayed or All.
Note : If no text is displayed on the 2D Map View, select the All option otherwise
no matches will be found.
To search the map:
1. Click the Search button .
2. Choose a method then click Find.
3. If more than one match is found, a list appears for you to choose from.
The map view centres on the requested area.
Note : In Site and Text searches, you can search by exact string, sub string or by
regular expression.
Examples of Searching by Regular Expression
This table gives some example of regular expressions that you could use when
searching the map for location:
Enter To Find
.* Everything
^MSC Sites beginning with MSC
3$ Sites ending in 3
^MSC.*3$ Sites beginning with MSC and ending with 3
.*LY[0-9][0-9][0-9] Sites with LY followed by three integers in them
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 27
Version 4.0
For example, this picture shows a find that has returned everything:
Printing Maps
You can print the contents of the Map View window. To do this:
1. On the Map View window, click the Page Setup button and specify page
orientation, size, source and margins; change the printer, printer properties
and number of copies. These settings default to those assigned as default by
the Windows printer driver.
Print
legend
Print preview
Print defined
area
Print
Page
setup
2. Click the Print Legend button and specify any title, copyright and comments
that you require. The default title is Untitled or the last used title of the
current session.
3. You can choose to:
Print the default legend for the plot or a customised legend that shows
only some elements.
Print the default logo or your own. As this is a raster format, you may
need to experiment with various image sizes to obtain the best image on
the hard copy printout. Any number of colours can be used (monochrome
to 24-bit colour).
4 28 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Print to Scale. This will scale your mapping data appropriately. For
example, if a 1:100000 scale is used on the output, every centimeter on the
printout will represent 1 kilometer. The midpoints of the current view are
used as the center of this printout.
Print Legend Dialog Box
4. Click OK.
5. Click the Print Preview button before you print, so you can verify plots before
sending them to the printer or plotter.
Printing A Pre-Defined Area
The print pre-defined area option is used for displaying only that area you select in
the map view. However there are some exceptions.
If the print to scale option in the Print Legend is not selected:
The printout view uses the scale found in the current view
The region displayed may vary so that the scale may be maintained, such
factors as paper size or layout are taken into account
If the Print to Scale option in the Print Legend is selected:
Only the center point of the area selected is used
Depending on paper size and the layout of the print, the region will most
likely be resized to maintain scale
To print a pre-defined area:
1. On the Map View window, click the Print Defined Area button.
2. Using the cursor, click and drag your mouse to select the area of the map you
want to print.
The Print Preview dialog box will appear so you can verify plots before
sending them to the printer or plotter.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 29
Version 4.0
About The Map Information Window
To get information about a particular point on the map, you can display the Map
Information window, either attached to the bottom of a Map View window or
separate from it. When there is no open Map View window, the Map Information
window is automatically closed.
The Map Information window displays the dimensions of the current view
expressed as width first and then height in kilometres. As you move the mouse
cursor over the map, the Map Information window displays information related to
the specific pixel under the cursor including location, height above sea level, the
clutter category, building height and nearest cell.
Map Information Window
You can choose which items are displayed.
Changing What the Map Information Window Displays
To change what the Map Information window displays:
1. On the Map Information window, click the Information Fields button .
2. Add and remove items as required, such as Location, Clutter, Nearest Cell
and so on.
In order to consume the least screen space, the window automatically re-sizes
according to how much information you have chosen to display.
Note : You can change how location and building height are displayed by double-
clicking the item in the Map Information window.
Using the Map Information Window Detached and Attached
You can display the Map Information window, either attached to the bottom of a
Map View window or detached from it.
If you have more than one Map View window open, use a detached Map
Information window. This one Map Information window will display information
about whichever Map View window is active.
To show and hide the Map Information window:
Click the Show/Hide button on the bottom of the Map View window.
Note : This button is inactive if you already have the Map Information
window displayed.
4 30 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
To detach the Map Information window:
1. Click the Pin/UnPin button .
2. Drag the Map Information window to the required location.
To attach the Map Information window to a Map View window:
Click the Pin/UnPin button again.
Viewing Information in the 3D Map View Window
The 3D Map View displays items that are shown in the ordinary (2D) Map View
window, only three-dimensionally.
To view information in the 3D Map View:
1. Ensure that you are displaying in the Map View window, the items that you
want to see in the 3D Map View window.
2. On the Map View window toolbar, click the 3D button .
The 3D Map View appears showing the same items as you are currently
displaying on the Map View window:
When using the 3D Map View window, you can use the toolbar buttons to zoom in
and out, rotate the display, and reposition the map.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 31
Version 4.0
Changing the Displayed Data in the 3D Map View
Because the 3D Map View is intended as a quick way of viewing information you
have displayed in the Map View, only in three dimensions, you cannot change what
data is displayed unless you shut the 3D Map View, change what is shown in the
Map View window then reopen the 3D Map View. However, you can zoom in and
out on the 3D map, rotate it, or reposition it.
Zooming In and Out
Use the zoom in and zoom out buttons on the 3D Map View window toolbar
to magnify or shrink the current display in the 3D Map View window by a factor of
two.
Rotating the Map
To rotate the displayed data:
Hold down the left mouse button and drag to rotate the map as required.
Moving up or right rotates the map clockwise, while moving down or left
rotates the map anticlockwise.
Repositioning the Map
To reposition the displayed data:
Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the data to the required
location.
Printing the Map
You can print the map displayed in the 3D Map View window. To do this:
On the 3D Map View window toolbar, click the Print Display button .
Viewing Solid and Wireframe Maps in the 3D Map View Window
You can display your data in two different ways in the 3D Map View window:
This view Displays data as
Solid view A filled, solid 3D relief structure, taking light into account. This enables you
view the map data more clearly than in the wireframe view, but takes time
and memory to to generate.
Wireframe view A simple skeleton line sketch of the data. While data cannot be viewed as
quite as clearly as in the solid view, it takes far less time to generate.
To show one of these views:
On the 3D Map View window toolbar, click either the Solid View button
or the Wireframe View button .
4 32 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Setting the Display Properties in the 3D Map View Window
In the 3D Map View window, you can change how the data is displayed. To do this:
1. On the 3D Map View window toolbar, click the Settings button .
This picture shows an example of the dialog box that appears:
2. In the Display Properties dialog box, on the Display Settings tab, you can:
Add a height factor to exaggerate the size of terrain, clutter and sites
Select how many sets of lines (horizontal and vertical) make up the
wireframe grid for the terrain and/or the clutter
Choose to display a black outline of each polygon used to generate the
image by selecting the Grid checkbox
Choose to display a fog to add some reality to the scene by creating a mist
around the image
Choose to display an axis
3. On the Fresnel Settings tab, you can:
Choose to display the fresnel zones of links and/or the links between sites
Select whether to use the approximation equation or the elliptical method
to calculate the fresnel zone
Select whether to use the Deygout Method or the Causebrook Correction
method to calculate diffraction
Select what percentage of the Fresnel zone to be displayed - 60% is
regarded as the first Fresnel zone
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 33
Version 4.0
About the Height Profile Window
Use the Height Profile window to see a two dimensional cross-section of the terrain
between two points on the map.
The Height Profile window shows:
Line of sight (LoS) between the two points
Clutter to change the colours displayed, double-click the clutter category in
the Map View window
Distance between the two points
Clearance, or height of an obstruction
Any resultant signal loss
Any obstructions, shown as vertical red lines
This picture shows an example of a Height Profile window incorporating the Fresnel
zone:
Indicates the closest obstruction
to the line of sight is 14m
Distances
between sites
Signal loss (dB)
4 34 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
You can get negative heights because the Height Profile window takes into
consideration earth curvature and represents this on a flat line from the start point:
Start End
End
Rotate until start is horizontal
Start
1.
2.
You can control the height profile with the buttons on the Height Profile toolbar.
This diagram shows the functions of the Height Profile window toolbar buttons:
Enables you to display
the path between two
properties
Enables you to show
or hide the Height
Profile properties tabs
Enables you to display the
path between a property
and a desired site
Enables you to display the
path between two desired
points
Stops the current
profile job, but keeps
the profile results
displayed
Cancels the
selected path
Displays Fresnel
clearance zones
Shows reflections
Minimises
Antenna Heights
Enables you to flip the
sites, so that the profile
is shown in reverse
Enables you to
print the height
profile
Refreshes the profile
The Height Profile toolbar
Note : If you do not have CONNECT installed, the Show Reflections and Minimise
Antenna Heights buttons will be disabled.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 35
Version 4.0
Viewing the Height Profile Key
To display the key window:
1. In the Height Profile window, ensure that the properties tabs are displayed. If
they are not, click the Show/Hide button.
2. Click the Key tab to show all of the colours and values assigned to the data
types displayed in the open Height Profile window.
An example Key is shown here:
Height Profile Window Key
You cannot use the key of the Height Profile window to edit colours and other
display properties. Instead, to edit colours and other properties:
Double-click the required item in the list of data types on the Map View.
or
Use the Map Information and Control dialog box.
Displaying a Path
To display a path between a site and a desired point, two sites, or two desired
points:
1. From the View menu, click Height Profile.
2. In the Height Profile window, click the appropriate button, for example, Site
to Point .
3. In the Map View window, click the site (or point) then move the cursor to the
desired point (or site) and click again.
If appropriate, the start and finish heights are set by the antenna heights of
the selected site and the global height setting for the mobile antenna
(normally 1.5m).
4 36 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
4. If you have selected Site to Site or Site to Point mode, you can select which
antenna from a property is used. To do this, click with the right mouse button
on the property and then double click the required antenna.
5. To display clutter, in the Height Profiler, click the Settings tab, and select the
clutter options that you require. You can select to use Clutter Heights,
Building Raster Heights, Building Vector Heights, or a combination of these.
Note : The appearance of this tab changes depending on the ENTERPRISE
products you have installed.
What Height is Used When Using Repeaters?
If you choose Site-To-Site and are using a repeater, then ENTERPRISE assumes that
you are looking for how that repeater might receive a signal for repeating, so the Rx
height is used.
If the profile mode is Site-To-Point and are using a repeater, then ENTERPRISE
assumes that you are looking at how the repeated/transmitted signal is received by
a mobile, so the Tx height is used.
Changing the Height Profile Settings
To change what the height profile displays, click the Settings tab.
This picture shows the ENTERPRISE core Height Profile Settings tab.
Height Profile Settings tab
Note : Any changes that you make to the values in the Height Profile window will
not be applied to the Site Database.
In the Sites pane of the Settings tab, you can:
Select the start and finish antenna heights for point to point mode. For site to
point and site to site modes, this is dictated by the height of the BS (Base
Station) antenna and the MS (Mobile Station) antenna.
Edit the Mast Height and Frequency.
In the Map Data pane of the Settings tab, you can:
Select which map data (if any) you want to include in the height profile
calculation Clutter Heights, Building Raster Heights and/or Building
Vector Heights
Select the resolution to be used in the height profile calculation
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 37
Version 4.0
Changing the Clutter Settings
To change which clutter settings are used for the height profile, click the Clutter tab.
On this tab, you can:
Specify if clutter height and categories are shown and choose a model to
select which clutter heights to use.
For Show Height to be effective within the Height Profile window, you must
first have defined these parameters on the Clutter tab of the Propagation
Model editor and selected the Use Clutter Height box.
Select the Show Category checkbox to have all available clutter categories
displayed in the Height Profile window.
You cannot change clutter settings here. To change them, double-click the
clutter item in the list of data types in the Map View window.
About The Logical Connection Viewer
The Logical Connection Viewer allows you to view and edit details of logical
connections and UMTS connections. Every connection active in the selected filter is
displayed in a list view showing its end points and the amount of traffic it carries.
An asterisk shows in the column to the left of the End A Node column if the
connection has not been committed. Also, the type of connection is shown in this
column.
The following picture shows an example of the Logical Connection Viewer:
To open the Logical Connection Viewer:
1. Ensure you have created some Logical Connections in the 2D Map View.
2. From the Database menu, click Logical Connections
To view and modify specific attributes of the logical connection, click Details>>
Tip : You can delete connections by clicking with the right mouse button on the
connection you wish to delete and selecting Delete.
4 38 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
You can edit the Logical Connection Viewer with attributes on the following tabs:
The General Tab This is used in the same way as in the Site Database
Window. For more information on this, see Chapter 6.
The Status Tab This is used in the same way as in the Site Database Window.
For more information on this, see Chapter 6.
The Traffic Tab
The Routes Tab
About The Traffic Tab In The Logical Connection Viewer
The Traffic tab displays any traffic that has been added to the logical connection.
This includes:
Traffic that is defined on UMTS Cells
Traffic that has been added to a node and assigned to the logical connection
Traffic that is added directly to the logical connection from this dialog box
This picture shows an example of the different sources shown in the Traffic tab:
On the Traffic tab you can:
Add traffic
Edit traffic
Remove traffic
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 39
Version 4.0
Adding Traffic To A Logical Connection
You can add traffic directly to a logical connection in the Logical Connection
Viewer. To do this:
1. In the left-hand pane of the Logical Connection Viewer, select the connection
you wish to add traffic to.
2. On the Traffic tab, click Add.
The Edit Traffic dialog box appears with a default set as the following:
3. If you want the two-way connections to be symmetric, select the Symmetric
option.
4. Enter the required Traffic Bitrate if different from the default and also the
number of subscribers.
5. Click OK.
Note : Remember to Apply and/or Commit your changes.
Editing Traffic On A Logical Connection
You can only edit traffic in the Logical Connection Viewer that has been added
directly to the logical connection.
To do this:
1. In the left-hand pane of the Logical Connection Viewer, select the connection
you wish to edit traffic.
2. In the Traffic tab select the Source you wish to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Amend the attributes you wish to edit in the same way as adding traffic.
5. Click OK.
Note : Remember to Apply and/or Commit your changes.
4 40 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Removing Traffic From A Logical Connection
You can only remove traffic in the Logical Connection Viewer that has been added
directly to the logical connection.
To do this:
1. On the Traffic tab, select the Source you wish to remove.
2. Click Remove.
Note : Remember to Apply and/or Commit your changes.
About The Routes Tab In The Logical Connection Viewer
The Routes tab allows you to view the logical connection routes and modify them.
For each route that is displayed, it will tell you if the physical route defined actually
connects the end nodes of the logical connection and will display the actual link
hops of the route.
On the Route tab you can:
Add a route to a Logical Connection
Add a hop to a route
Remove a hop from a route
Adding A Route To A Logical Connection
To add a route to a logical connection:
1. Ensure you have created links between nodes in the 2D Map View.
2. In the Logical Connection Viewer, on the Routes tab, click Add Route.
Adding A Hop To A Route
To add a hop to a route:
1. In the Logical Connection Viewer, on the Routes tab, select the route you
wish to add a hop to and click Add Hop.
2. From the dialog box that appears, select the link in the drop down menu that
you wish to use and click OK.
3. Repeat this until no more hops are required.
Note : This message box will warn you when there are no more hops
required:
4. To validate the route, click Apply.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 4 41
Version 4.0
The following picture shows an example of a valid route:
Removing A Hop From A Route
To remove a hop from a route:
1. In the Logical Connection Viewer, on the Routes tab, expand the Route the
Hop is in and select the Hop.
2. Click Remove Hop.
Note : Remember to Apply and/or Commit your changes.
About the Master View
The Master View window is a small-scale map, which indicates with a rectangle the
position of any currently opened map view.
To open the Master View window:
From the View menu, click Master View.
Master View
To choose what data is displayed on the master view:
On the Master View, click the right mouse button and select the data you
require.
Tip : You can scroll your map view using the master view window. To do this, drag
the rectangle to the required position.

4 42 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 1
Version 4.0
5 Working with Data
Overview of Working with Data
This chapter describes the following topics:
Using site templates
Using nominals and candidates
Using GPS
Using filters
Setting default identifiers
Converting files
Creating vectors and polygons
Editing the map data
Using site status flags
Using attachments
Using photographs
Using Site Templates
When planning a network, it is very likely that many sites will have the same
characteristics. Instead of setting each property on each site to the same value
individually, you can create and define site templates for each site type, then select a
template to use as a base for any new sites. The new sites will then contain the
default properties of the template.
5 2 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Depending on the products you have installed, you can create site templates for
these site types:
Template Description
MSC, BSC, Site
Distribution Node
Repeater
Neighbours
These are parts of the Logical Network for ASSET. If you have ASSET
installed, see the ASSET User Reference Guide for specific information of
creating an ASSET site template.
PLMN, WMSC,
SGSN, RNS, NodeB
These are parts of the Logical Network for 3G. If you have 3g installed,see
the 3g User Reference Guide for specific information on creating a 3g site
template.
Although you can create as many templates as you want, only one template of each
type can be active at any one time.
Creating a Site Template
If appropriate to the products you have installed, use these instructions to create a
site template:
1. From the Options menu, click Site Templates.
2. In the Templates pane, click with the right mouse button in the white space
and click the type you want to add.
3. Enter the name of the template in the dialog box and click OK.
4. On the tabs, enter the defaults for hexagon radius, the status flags and the
type of installation.
Note : To edit the properties of an existing template, select the template in the
templates pane, then on the various tabs, edit the properties.
5. Click Apply to save the changes.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 3
Version 4.0
Adding Cells and Cell Layers to Site Templates
Depending on the products you have installed, you can add cells and cell layers to
site templates. To configure templates for sites to include cells and cell layers:
1. Click with the right mouse button on a site.
2. From the menu that appears, click Add Cell.
Similarly you can click with the right mouse button on a Cell and add a Cell
Layer.
3. On the tabs, change the cell or cell layer properties as required.
4. If you want to plan a site hopping network using MA lists, ensure that you
have allocated the carrier layer that you are using as an MA list, on the Cell
Layer Carriers tab.
Note : For a site hopping network, a 1/1 MA list pattern is usual that is, the
same MA list is allocated to all of the cells on the site. If you use a 1/3 pattern
(where a different MA list is allocated to each cell), you will be using
synthesiser frequency hopping.
For more information on this, see Chapter 6.
Tip : For cell layers, you can use the (E)GPRS tab to set the
channel/modulation coding schemes for GPRS and EGPRS cell layers and the
required traffic, and the HSCSD/ECSD tab for the required traffic.
Deleting a Site Template
To delete a site template:
1. From the Options menu, click Site Templates.
2. In the Templates pane, select the template you wish to delete.
3. Click with the right mouse button on the template and from the menu that
appears, click Delete.
Note : You cannot delete a template if it is the only template for that type of
site.
Using Nominal and Candidate Properties
In ENTERPRISE, a nominal Property is a new Property placed in an approximate
location, that you can use as a way of indicating that you need a site somewhere
near this area. Using the search area of the nominal Property, you define the radius
that you consider as suitable for your new Property. In this search area, you can
place a number of other Properties called candidates - that are possible alternative
locations for the new site.
A Property is a technology-independent real estate location. A Site refers to the
technology/equipment that is located at the Property on which it is parented.
5 4 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Note : Depending on the options you have chosen on the Candidate Options tab of
the Preferences dialog box, you can have candidates automatically take on the same
equipment and parameters as the nominal Property.
Options on this tab apply only to search areas created after the Enable checkbox was
selected. For full details of using this tab to set candidate options, see Chapter 2.
Adding Nominals and Candidates
To place nominal and candidate Properties:
1. On the Candidate Options tab of the Preferences dialog box, ensure that you
have selected the Enable Candidate Functionality check box and chosen your
preferred settings.
For full details on doing this, see Chapter 2. These options will not affect any
existing search areas.
2. In the Map View window, add a Property in the approximate location that
you are interested in (or use an existing one).
3. Click the Search Area button .
4. Click the Property and drag until the search area is of the required size.
This search area now defines the location you are interested in and the
Property is referred to as a nominal Property.
5. Add the sites and equipment that you need for this nominal and set up all the
parameters, such as which model you require and so on.
Tip : If you have selected to do so, on the Candidate Options tab in the
Preferences dialog box, the nominal's equipment and parameters are copied
to each candidate you add.
6. Place new Properties or move any existing ones (as long as they were created
with the check box selected as described in step 1) into this search area.
Depending upon the options you have selected, the candidates:
Can take on the characteristics of the nominal including the cells,
equipment, cell layers, parameters and so on. BSCs, MSCs and repeaters
are not duplicated.
Can have the same name as the nominal but appended with a unique
letter.
Can be moved in or out of the search area.
Important : Any equipment you add to a nominal Property when it already
has candidates, will not be copied to those candidates but will be copied to
any new candidates that you add.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 5
Version 4.0
This picture shows a nominal with three candidates:
Adding More Candidates to a Nominal
If you have an existing nominal, you can expand the search area to include further
Properties. However, you can also mark a Property as a candidate when it is outside
the existing search area. To do this:
1. Click the Make Candidate button .
2. Click the relevant nominal Property then click the Property you want to be a
candidate.
or
Click the prospective candidate then click the nominal Property.
3. When asked to confirm, click Yes to add this candidate to the selected
nominal.
This picture shows that Property157 has an existing search area containing
one candidate. By using the Make Candidate button, Property184 is also
being added as a candidate:
5 6 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Displaying Candidates and Nominals on the Map
You can show candidates on the Map View. To do this:
1. Click the Show Candidates button .
2. Click the Nominal Property that you are interested in.
A line is displayed on the Map View from the nominal to the candidate
Property as shown here:
Removing Candidate Status from a Property
To remove candidate status from a Property:
1. Click the Break Candidates button in the Map View window.
2. Click the candidate.
You are asked whether you want the candidate to be removed or not:
Note : You can also remove candidate status from a Property by resizing a search
area to exclude a candidate.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 7
Version 4.0
Resizing the Search Area to Exclude the Candidate
To remove candidate status from a Property by resizing the search area:
1. Ensure the search area for the Property is not locked on the Search Area tab in
the Site Database:
2. Resize the search area of the nominal so that the candidate is no longer
included in the search area.
What Happens When Search Areas Overlap?
If you have nominal Properties whose search areas overlap on the map and you
place a candidate site in the common area, you are asked which nominal Property
you want the new Property to belong to:
Nominal Sites with Overlapping Search Areas
5 8 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About Using GPS
ENTERPRISE is a portable planning tool. You can connect ENTERPRISE to a NMEA
compatible GPS system and using site placement, locate your position on the earth.
So, when you are at a new site, you can obtain your co-ordinates and then choose
automatically to:
Indicate on the map where you are
Move a specified site to the current location
Create a new site at the current location
Positioning the GPS Receiver
You must position the GPS receiver so that it has an unobstructed view of the sky as
it must "see" at least four satellites in order to get a fix on its position. Therefore, it is
recommended that you place the GPS receiver on the roof of the survey vehicle
using a magnetic mount.
Before using the GPS Receiver for the first time, you must ensure that the GPS has
had enough time to obtain a fix on its position. The first fix can sometimes take up to
30 minutes because the GPS needs to store the constellation information for the
satellites of its current location.
On subsequent occasions, if the GPS has moved less than 500 km since it last
obtained a position fix, it will produce a fix within a few minutes. Improvements in
accuracy can be achieved if you increase this period of time to about five minutes, as
it is more likely that the GPS will have had time to produce a 3d fix instead of a 2d
fix.
Using GPS
To use GPS:
1. Ensure you have connected the GPS system correctly.
2. From the Tools menu, click GPS Interface.
This dialog box appears:
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 9
Version 4.0
3. Choose the correct Com Port and click Connect.
4. In a Map View window, display a map that includes your position and then:
To Do This
View your current location You need not do anything - the position is automatically
shown as a crosshair on the map
Move a site to the current
position
Click the Move button and move to any location in the box
surrounding the crosshair
Add a new site (or
distribution node and so on)
Click the Add Site button and place the new site near the
crosshair at the current position
Using Filters
A filter is a way of selecting a subset of items such as Properties, sites, links or cell
layers, from the ENTERPRISE database. You can define, edit or delete filters.
Note : Filters are available only to you unless you commit them to the database.
Ensure you only commit filters that other users will want to use.
Organising Filters
To enable you to store and organise your filters effectively, you can set up folders in
which to store your filters. All filters and filter folders are stored in the main folder,
Filter Database.
To create a new folder for filters:
1. From the Database menu, click Filters.
2. In the Site filters dialog box, click with the right mouse button on the Filters
Database folder.
3. From the menu that appears, click New Folder.
4. Type the name of the new folder and click OK.
Tip : You can also create folders within folders, by clicking with the right mouse
button on a folder, and then clicking New Folder.
Adding Filters
To add a filter:
1. From the Database menu, click Filters.
2. In the dialog box that appears, select the folder that you want to put the filter
in.
3. Click the right mouse button, and from the menu that appears, click New
Filter.
5 10 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
4. Name your filter.
Note : It is recommended that you have a different naming convention for
personal filters and public filters.
Click Next.
5. Select an element type to be included in the filter, by highlighting it in the
Available Attributes pane and clicking the right arrow button.
The selected element or criterion is placed in the Selected Attributes pane.
Tip : If you want to include a particular criterion associated with an element
type, for example the Flags criterion for the Property element type, expand
the list for the element type, select the required criterion and click the right
arrow button. To select the Polygons criterion, expand the Properties element.
6. Elements and criteria are grouped in logical rule trees.
To add another element or criterion to a logical rule tree, select the logical
operator for that tree, select the element or criterion from the Available
attributes pane and click the right arrow button.
or
To create a new logical rule tree, in the Selected Attributes pane, select the
element or criterion you want to include in the new tree, then from the
Available Attributes pane select the next element or criterion you want to
include, and then click the right arrow button.
7. If an element in the Selected Attributes pane has two or more nodes beneath
it, you can edit the logical operator. The default is OR, meaning that a value
will be returned if any of the attributes are present. But by clicking the right
mouse button on the logical operator you can change this to AND, meaning
that a value will only be returned if all of the attributes are present. When you
have set this accordingly, click Next.
8. Define the exact rule for the element type or criterion by highlighting it in the
Selected Attributes pane, and selecting a rule definition (for example Equals).
Tip : To make the rule definition negative (for example, Not Greater Than),
select the Not option.
9. To choose the values for this rule definition, click the Values button, and
select the values that you require. The options available are dependent on the
type of rule you are defining.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 11
Version 4.0
10. Click Next and in the final window, choose the type of filter you require:
Select To
Dynamic Filter Have results constantly updated as the network evolves.
For example, a filter based on a polygon that defines a geographic
operational region will always represent the sites within that region
regardless of when the filter was created.
Static Filter Have filter results that never change.
For example, a filter may define the sites active on the commercial
launch of the network. In this example, you would not wish the filter to
change regardless of the current date. It would be a piece of history!
If you chose the static method, the result of the filter at that point is
frozen. It is then possible to modify the filter on a site by site basis.
Note : Add Sites from File adds the sites listed in a text file. The file
format is a list of site identifiers each on a separate line.
11. Add items to the filter results by using any of the following tabs:
On this tab To add items to the filter results, do this
Identifier 1. Select the element type that you want to add.
2. Type the element ID, either defining an exact match or defining the
match with a regular expression. For more information on using
regular expressions, see Chapter 4. You can make this case-
sensitive by selecting the Match case option.
3. Click Add, and all of the elements matching this identifier will be
displayed in the Active Elements box.
File List 1. Select the element type that you want to add.
2. Type the file name, or click the button and locate the correct
file.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Add, and all of the elements matching this identifier will be
displayed in the Active Elements box.
Map View 1. Select the element type you want to add.
2. Click the required option:
- The Add Elements option enables you to click elements of the
selected type in a 2D view window to add them to the list
- The Remove Elements option enables you to click elements of the
selected type in a 2D view window to remove them from the list
- The Add Elements in View option enables you to add the elements
of the selected type that are currently displayed
- The Remove Elements in View option enables you to remove the
elements of the selected type that are currently displayed
12. When you have completed your filter, click Finish.
5 12 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Editing Filters
To edit an existing filter:
1. From the Database menu, click Filters.
2. In the Filters dialog box, select the filter you want to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Use the Filter Wizard to modify the filter.
Note : To rename a filter, in the Filters dialog box, select the required filter, click the
right hand mouse button and then click Rename. In the dialog box that appears,
type the new name and click OK.
Deleting Filters
To delete an existing filter:
1. From the Database menu, click Filters.
2. In the Filter dialog box, select the filter you want to delete.
3. Click the right mouse button, and from the menu that appears, click Delete.
The filter is moved to the wastebasket.
4. To make this filter unavailable to other users, remove it from the wastebasket.
Until you do this, the filter is still available to others.
Moving Filters
As you organise your filters, you may want to move them between folders. You can
do this in one of two ways:
1. Select the filter you want to move.
2. Click the right mouse button, and from the menu that appears, click Cut.
3. Select the folder that you want to move the filter to.
4. Click the right mouse button, and from the menu that appears, click Paste.
or
1. Select the filter you want to move, and while still holding the left mouse
button down, drag the filter onto the required folder.
2. Release the left mouse button to place in the folder.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 13
Version 4.0
Displaying Filters
As well as appearing in the Site Database window, when you have defined a filter, it
appears in the list of data types that you can display in the Map View window.
As with other items in the list of data types, you can double-click a filter to change
its display properties.
You can customise such things as symbol size and colour, hexagon type and outline,
and which textual elements to display.
Example Filters
The examples below represent some of the typical filters that you may want to
create. They cover the following scenarios:
Filtering on a polygon
Filtering on a polygon with another polygon within it
Filtering on a flag from a parent property
Filtering on a flag from a network element
Filtering on a parent MSC/BSC
Filtering on Different Attributes in More Than One Polygon
Example Filter 1 Filtering on a Polygon
You may want to filter properties, sites and so on based on a polygon that you have
created.
If you have polygons, you can select sites based on geographic regions defined by
the vector polygon data to be included in a filter.
You may have polygons:
In your purchased mapping data, for example, defining a municipality
boundary
That you have defined yourself using the ENTERPRISE Vector Editor, for
example, to show an operational region
For example, you may want to filter all cell sites on your North Region polygon.
To do this:
1. In the Available Attributes pane, expand the Property category.
2. Expand the Polygons category, select the North Region polygon and then
click the right arrow button .
3. In the Available Attributes pane, select Cell Site and then click the right arrow
button .
5 14 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
4. Ensure the logical operator is set to AND, since you want to filter on
everything that is a cell site and in the North Region polygon. This picture
shows this example:
5. Click Next.
6. Ensure that the rule definition for Cell Site is Is Equal To, and the rule
definition for North Region polygon is Within.
7. Click Next, and then click Finish.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 15
Version 4.0
Example Filter 2 Filtering on a Polygon with Another Polygon Within It
You may want to filter on a polygon that has another polygon within it, but want to
exclude the smaller polygon and all of the site data it contains. For example, in the
network shown in this picture, you may want to filter on polygon A but exclude
polygon B:
Polygon A
Polygon B
To do this:
1. In the Available Attributes pane, expand the Property category.
2. Expand the Polygons category, select Polygon A and then click the right
arrow button .
3. Repeat for Polygon B.
4. Ensure that the logical operator is set to AND, since you want to filter on
everything in Polygon A and not in Polygon B. This picture shows this
example:
5 16 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
5. Click Next.
6. Ensure that the rule definition for Polygon A is Within, and the rule
definition for Polygon B is Not Within.
7. Click Next, and then Click Finish.
Example Filter 3 Filtering on a Flag from a Parent Property
You may want to filter properties, sites and so on based on a flag assigned to the
parent properties of MSCs (as opposed to a flag assigned to the MSCs themselves).
For example, you may want to filter all MSCs that have the Region flag on their
parent property.
To do this:
1. In the Available Attributes pane, expand the Property category.
2. Expand the Flags category, select the Region flag and then click the right
arrow button .
3. In the Available Attributes pane, select MSC and then click the right arrow
button .
4. Ensure the logical operator is set to AND, since you want to filter on
everything that is an MSC and has a Region flag attached to its Property. This
picture shows this example:
5. Click Next.
6. Ensure that the rule definition for MSC is Is Equal To, and the rule definition
for Property Region Flag is Equals.
7. Click the Values button for Property Region Flag and select the flag values
you want to filter on. Click OK when you are satisfied.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 17
Version 4.0
8. Click Next, and then click Finish.
Example Filter 4 Filtering on a Flag from a Network Element
You may want to filter properties, sites and so on based on a certain flag assigned to
them. For example, you may want to filter all BSCs that have the Smithcom flag
assigned to them.
To do this:
1. In the Available Attributes pane, expand the BSC category.
2. Expand the Flags category, select the Smithcom flag and then click the right
arrow button . This picture shows how this example should look in the
Selected Attributes pane:
3. Click Next.
4. Ensure that the rule definition for BSC Smithcom Flag is Equals.
5. Click the Values button for BSC Smithcom Flag and select the flag values you
want to filter on. Click OK when you are satisfied.
6. Click Next, and then click Finish.
5 18 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Example Filter 5 Filtering on a Parent MSC/BSC
You may want to filter sites and so on based on their parent BSCs. For example, you
may want to filter all cell sites that have BSC1 as their parent.
To do this:
1. In the Available Attributes pane, expand the BSC category.
2. Select Hierarchy and then click the right arrow button .
3. In the Available Attributes pane, select Cell Site and then click the right arrow
button .
4. Ensure that the logical operator is set to AND, since you want to filter on
everything that is a cell site and has a parent BSC. This picture shows this
example:
5. Click Next.
6. Ensure that the rule definition for BSC Hierarchy is Is under, and the rule
definition for Cell Site is Is Equal To.
7. Click the Values button for BSC Hierarchy and select the parent BSC(s) you
want to filter on. Click OK when you are satisfied.
8. Click Next, and then click Finish.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 19
Version 4.0
Example Filter 6 Filtering on Different Attributes in More Than One
Polygon
You may want to filter on more than one polygon, but based on different attributes.
For example, you may want to filter on Cell Sites in Polygon 1, but MSCs in Polygon
2. To do this:
1. In the Available Attributes pane, expand the Property category.
2. Expand the Polygons category, select Polygon 1 and then click the right arrow
button .
3. Repeat for Polygon 2.
4. In the Selected Attributes pane, select Polygon 1.
5. In the Available Attributes pane, select Cell Site and then click the right arrow
button .
A new logical rule tree is created, containing Polygon 1 and Cell Sites.
6. In the Selected Attributes pane, select Polygon 2.
7. In the Available Attributes pane, select MSCs and then click the right arrow
button .
A new logical rule tree is created, containing Polygon 2 and MSCs.
8. Ensure that the logical operator for the whole filter is set to OR, but the logical
operators for each logical rule tree are set to AND. This picture shows this
example:
9. Click Next.
10. Ensure that the rule definitions for the two polygons are set to Within, and
the rule definitions for Cell Sites and MSCs are set to Is Equal To.
11. Click Next and then click Finish.
5 20 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Setting Default Identifiers
You can set the default identifiers for a variety of network elements, so that their IDs
are based on a specified string.
Site Identifier dialog box
To set default identifiers:
1. From the Options menu, click the required Identifier Creation option:
Product Identifier Creation Option(s) Used to Create Default
Identifiers For
ASSET Identifier Creation Sites, Cells, Repeaters
CONNECT Site Identifier Creation Sites, Cells, Repeaters
Link Identifier Creation Links, Hubs, Sectors, Carriers,
Antennas
2. If you select Identifier Creation or Site Identifier Creation:
In the Cell pane, choose the option you require for cells.
In the Cell pane, select Update CI If SiteID Altered if you want a cell's ID
to automatically update if its parent site ID changes.
Also select the option you require for repeaters and properties.
New sites will have this string plus a digit. New cells and repeaters will have
a default ID based on the site ID, according to the various formats available.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 21
Version 4.0
3. If you select Link Identifier Creation:
In the required panes, specify the base strings you want.
In the Zero Padding pane, you can select to use padding and specify the
number of digits used
Converting Files
You can convert files:
From Planet text files to binary format, so they can be read by ENTERPRISE
From ENTERPRISE text files to binary format, for speed
From ENTERPRISE vector files (*.txt) to binary format, for speed
To convert files:
1. On the Utilities tab, from the Converters menu, click the appropriate option.
2. Browse to select the .txt file you want to convert.
3. Click Convert.
About Creating Your Own Vectors and Polygons
You can create and display your own vectors and polygons, which is saved with the
project.
First it is necessary to define some terms:
A set of points is called a segment and a vector consists of one or more
segments
A polygon also consists of one or more segments, but at least one of the
segments must be closed
An attribute belongs to a segment within a vector or polygon
A set of vectors is called a layer
Creating Your Own Vectors and Polygons
To create your own vectors or polygons:
1. Ensure you have specified a standard vector folder and user vector folder in
your project.
2. Ensure you have a Map View window open with the required area displayed.
3. Click the Utilities tab on the main menu.
5 22 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
4. From the Editors menu, click Vector. The Vector Editor appears:
Tip : Polygons can be used as the basis for a site filter. You can select only
sites that are within a polygon, allowing the network to be split up into
regions.
5. To add a new vector or polygon, for example the path of a new road or an
area that you want to define, click with the right mouse button on the
category you wish to add and click the appropriate Add option. Name the
new item.
6. Click Start.
7. In the Map View window, click the start point and all subsequent points of
the vector or polygon.
If you make a mistake, click Undo to remove the last mouse click.
Tip : You don't have to link up the two ends of a polygon, just click Stop and
they are linked automatically.
8. Click Stop, if you have not done so already.
9. Click Save to add the vector or polygon to the database.
10. Now you can add more segments to this vector or polygon by repeating steps
6 9.
Note : You cannot delete individual segments from a vector or polygon when
you have added them. You can only delete the whole vector or polygon.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 23
Version 4.0
This picture shows one polygon that contains two segments:
11. Now you can add attributes to each segment.
Adding Attributes to a Vector or Polygon
When you have added a vector or polygon, you can add attributes to it. Attributes
can be information such as salary, quality of area, population data and so on, that
you can assign a value to.
To add an attribute to an existing vector or polygon:
1. In the Vector Editor, select the required vector or polygon in the tree pane.
2. Open a Map View window and display the vector or polygon.
3. Click in the Map View nearest to the segment for which you want to add an
attribute.
4. On the Segment Attribute tab, click Add.
5. In the dialog box that appears:
Enter an attribute name, for example Population
Choose whether you want the value to be an integer or a double (that is,
with a decimal place)
Enter the value that you require
6. Click OK and the information is added to the segment.
7. You can repeat steps 3 6 for each segment you wish to add attributes to but
if you do so, use the same attribute name in all segments if you want to
display the different values of it in different colours, or if you want to use
population statistics in ASSET.
5 24 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
8. In the Vector Editor, on the Segment Attributes tab, click Add and enter a
name for the attribute and a type and value. For example:
For information about changing the display of vectors and polygons, see
Chapter 4.
About the Vector Editor
Use the Vector Editor to create, edit and delete vectors and polygons, providing that
you have the correct permissions to do so. You can also:
Categorise or re-categorise each vector or polygon as either standard vectors
or standard polygons, user vectors or polygons, or building vectors
Categorise or re-categorise whether a vector is to be treated as a polygon or a
vector using drag and drop
Note : A vector must contain at least one polygon, to be treated as a polygon.
Create, rename and delete groups of vectors and select the vectors and
polygons contained within them
Edit the attributes of each segment for the selected vector or polygon
Using the Map View window and the Vector Editor, you can:
Add and remove points from existing and new vectors
Select and move points within existing and new vectors
Identify the nearest segment to the point clicked on the map and select it in
the User Defined Vectors pane for easier editing of segment attributes
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 25
Version 4.0
Importing Vector Data
You can import selected vector data from a previous version, including building
vectors, from text or binary files into the database at any time.
To import vector data:
In the Vector Editor, click with the right mouse button on the selected vector
and from the menu that appears, click Insert from File.
All the vector files are converted into the new vector binary format (*.vbf) and
inserted into the database.
Loading Population Data
Population polygons are loaded in the same way as building vectors. Just as
building vectors have an associated attribute file, which specifies the building
height, population polygons have an attribute file specifying the population within a
polygon. The loading of attributes within the database is generic and is not specific
to the population polygons, so you can use the following instructions for any files
with attributes:
1. Ensure your data is in the correct format with one polygon file containing lots
of segments, each segment having a population attribute indicating the
population in that segment.
2. Ensure that the files are located in the same folder that you have chosen for
Building Vectors on the Map Data Directories tab of the Modify Project dialog
box:
3. In the Vector Editor, drag the population polygon from the Building Vectors
list to the Standard Polygons list:
4. If in ASSET you now wanted to create a coverage array, you would be able to
select the Population Statistics check box and choose the population attribute
to analyse.
5 26 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Using Polygons to Count the Number of Sites in an Area
You can use a polygon to count the number of sites in a particular area. To do this:
1. Ensure you have specified the necessary standard vectors and user vectors
folders in your project.
2. Ensure you have a Map View window open with the required area displayed.
3. On the Utilities tab, from the Editors menu, click Vectors.
4. Click with the right mouse button on User Polygons and click the Add Layer
and name a layer, then Add Vector/Polygon and name the item.
5. Click Start.
6. In the Map View window, click the start point and all subsequent points of
the polygon.
7. If you make a mistake, click Undo to remove the last mouse click.
8. Click Stop to join up the endpoints of the polygon automatically then click
Save.
9. From the Database menu, click Filters, and define a dynamic filter that
contains only your polygon.
Now when you have that filter selected, the number of sites is displayed at
the bottom of the window:
Troubleshooting Vector Attributes
You can define a specific name and value for a segment, of a vector or polygon. For
example, population density.
If when doing this you get this message in the Message Log window:
Please select a segment within vector:name to add new
attributes
You need to select the segment in the Map View first, before you click Add and
enter the attribute details.
Editing the Map Data
You can edit terrain height, clutter type and building height.
Warning : Be certain you want to change these features. You can only reverse any
changes you make by laboriously changing each individual point back to its original
value.
Important : Any changes you make are saved to the map data directories and will
affect all projects that use the same mapping data.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 27
Version 4.0
Editing Terrain Height
To edit terrain height:
1. Ensure you really want to change terrain height because you can only reverse
any changes you make by changing each individual point back to its original
value.
2. On the Utilities tab, from the Editors menu, click Height.
3. In the Map View window, click the point whose height you want to change,
type the new height and click Apply.
4. Any changes you make are saved to the map data directories and will affect
all projects that use the same mapping data.
Editing Clutter Types
You can change clutter from one type to another:
For an area of one type of clutter where the area is either linked by orthogonal
connections between blocks only or includes those pixels linked diagonally as
well
For part of an area of clutter by defining a polygon
For a single location
Warning : Be certain you want to change these features. You can only reverse any
changes you make by laboriously changing each individual point back to its original
value.
Important : Any changes you make are saved to the map data directories and will
affect all projects that use the same mapping data.
Editing Clutter for an Area
To change any area of one clutter type to another clutter type:
1. In the Map View window, ensure you have clutter displayed.
2. On the Utilities tab, from the Editors menu, click Clutter.
3. In the Clutter Editor, click Select Area.
4. By selecting the Area Can Be Connected Diagonally check box, choose
whether you want the area to include those pixels that are only connected
diagonally, or whether you want to exclude those pixels.
5 28 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
The following is an example of how this affects your selection:
Example of Including and Excluding Pixels to Be Connected
For this area of clutter:
you could select to include pixels linked diagonally as shown here:
or select not to include them as shown here:
5. In the Map View window, click the area whose clutter type you want to edit.
6. In the Clutter Editor, in the Clutter Types pane, select a different clutter type
and click Apply.
You can also add new clutter types, rename an existing type and remove all
instances of a clutter type by using the appropriate buttons.
Editing Clutter for Part of an Area
If you have an area of one clutter type, where the area is linked by orthogonal
connections between blocks or includes pixels linked diagonally, you can choose to
change part of the area from one clutter type by defining a polygon:
1. In the Map View window, ensure you have clutter displayed.
2. On the Utilities tab, from the Editors menu, click Clutter.
3. In the Clutter Editor, ensure Select Area is selected.
4. Click Start Polygon.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 29
Version 4.0
5. On the map, click to define the nodes of the polygon.
Tip : To join the start and last point together automatically, double-click the
last node.
6. Choose whether you want the area to include those pixels that are only
connected diagonally, or whether you want to exclude those pixels.
7. Click in the polygon. It flashes on the map, and in the Clutter Editor, the
current clutter type is selected in the list.
8. Select the new clutter type from the list that will apply to the area within the
polygon and click Apply.
9. Ensure you have selected to display that type of clutter on the map and click
Redraw.
The clutter type within the polygon is changed.
Note : Where the polygon contains different clutter types, you can only select
one type at a time, that is, only one type flashes. For each type, repeat steps 7
to 8 above. You are changing from one type to another so the clutter
boundaries stay the same.
Editing Clutter at a Single Location
To edit clutter for a single point where a clutter type is already defined:
1. On the Utilities tab, from the Editors menu, click Clutter.
2. In the Map View window, click the point whose clutter type you want to edit.
The co-ordinates in the Clutter Editor reflect the point you have selected.
3. In the Clutter Editor, ensure Select Point is selected.
4. Click a different clutter type and click Apply.
You can also rename and remove clutter for the selected area or add a new
category of clutter.
If do not have write permissions to rename, add or remove clutter, a message
appears in the Message Log, and the changes are not made in the Clutter Editor.
Editing Building Heights
If you have building raster data, you can edit the building height of:
A single point
A contiguous area of a range of heights (to a single value)
A contiguous area of a range of heights within a polygon (to a single value)
A contiguous area is an area either limited to orthogonal connections between
blocks or also including those pixels connected diagonally.
Warning : Be certain you want to change these features. You can only reverse any
changes you make by laboriously changing each individual point back to its original
value.
5 30 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Important : Any changes you make are saved to the map data directories and will
affect all projects that use the same mapping data.
Editing Building Height at a Single Point
To edit building height for a single point:
1. On the Utilities tab, from the Editors menu, click Building.
The Building Height Editor appears:
2. Ensure Select Point is selected.
3. In the Map View window, click the point whose height you want to edit.
The co-ordinates are displayed in the Building Height Editor.
4. In the Height box, type the new height, and then click Apply.
Editing Building Height for a Contiguous Area
To edit building height for a whole contiguous area on the map (an area either
limited to orthogonal connections between pixels or also including pixels that are
only connected diagonally):
1. On the Utilities tab, from the Editors menu, click Building.
2. In the Map View window, click the required location.
3. In the Building Height Editor, click Select Area.
4. Select whether the area extends over diagonal connections or not.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 31
Version 4.0
5. Using the slide bar, select an amount of deviation this is the tolerance
within which heights surrounding the selected pixel will be counted as being
within the area to be changed.
If you set a deviation of 2m, clicking a pixel in the Map View will result in
that pixel plus any connecting pixels that have the same height plus or minus
2m being selected.
So, if the deviation is 2m, clicking on a square of height 20m will select that
plus any connected pixels with a height of 18m to 22m.
6. In the Height box, type the required height, and then click Apply.
All the selected squares now have the height you entered.
Editing Building Height for Part of a Contiguous Area
To edit building height for part of a contiguous area:
1. On the Utilities tab, from the Editors menu, click Building.
2. Ensure Select Area is selected.
3. Select whether the area extends over diagonal connections or not.
4. Click Start Polygon.
5. In the Map View window, click to define the nodes of the polygon.
6. When defining the last node, double-click it or click Stop Polygon.
7. Using the slide bar, select an amount of deviation.
If you set a deviation of 5m, clicking a pixel in the Map View will result in
that pixel plus any connecting pixels that have the same height plus or minus
5m being selected.
So, if the deviation is 5m, clicking on a square of height 20m will select that
plus any connected pixels with a height of 15m to 25m.
8. In the Height box, type the required height.
9. Click Apply to change only the building heights that fall within both the
polygon and the contiguous area of heights.
Using Site Status Flags
To keep track of the progress of each site within the engineering cycle, you can
define your own status flags to show whether the Property or site is Proposed,
Under Development, RFI, Operational and so on. You can also use flags to:
Record any other data which is associated with a site, such as name of
engineer
Divide the network into regions
Mark a site as being a member of a group of proposed sites planned to come
on line at a certain date
5 32 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
For each of the required attributes, you create a flag group, for example, Site Status,
and the names of mutually exclusive options within this group (Proposed,
Operational and so on). There is a limit of 20 flag groups.
You can use flags in site filters to display or modify sites based on their status or
other attributes. For example, you could choose to display only BSCS whose status
was Completed. You can also use flags in link filters.
Note : Set up your flag groups and flags as early in the project as possible. Changing
them (deleting, adding, renaming) later on may cause any dynamic filters based on
flags to become out of date.
You can also use your date-related flags in TARGET, the recommended cellular
engineering project management tool. For information on this, see the TARGET User
Reference Guide.
Status flags are created in the ENTERPRISE Administrator. For more information on
how to define status flags for sites or links, see the ENTERPRISE Installation and
Administration Guide.
Viewing Flags for Sites
To see if a site or Property has a flag:
1. From the Site Database window, click the required site or Property.
2. Click the Info button to expand the Site Database window.
3. Click the Status tab to see a list of the groups of flags and to see which flags
are associated with the site or Property.
4. On this tab, you can edit the associated flags.
Examples of Flags
Examples of flag groups and flags could include:
Flag Group Flags
Status -, SARF Issued, TSS Planned, TSS Completed, Approved On Hold
System -, GSM/900, DCS/1800, GSM and DCS, TETRA, UMTS
Zone -, Leeds, Liverpool, Derby, Manchester
Region -, Region 1, Region 2, Region 3
Phase -, Phase 1, Phase 2, Phase 3, Phase 4
Note : It is recommended that you name the first flag in each group to something
like "" as this will be the default flag used when you have not set a particular flag
to a site or Property.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 33
Version 4.0
Using Attachments
You can associate extra information with an installation within the ENTERPRISE
database by using attachments.
Only a shortcut to the attachment is stored in the database, so if the attachment file
is moved or deleted, the shortcut will not work.
Adding Attachments
To associate a file with a site:
1. In the Site Database window, navigate to the site that you want to have an
attachment.
2. Click the Attachments tab.
3. Click the Add File button and locate the attachment or using a tool such
as Windows Explorer, drag the file into the attachment area.
A shortcut to the attachment is stored in the database. If the associated file is
moved or deleted, the shortcut will not work.
Viewing Attachments
To view a file associated with a site:
1. In the Site Database window, select the site.
2. Click the Attachments tab.
3. Click the right mouse button on the attachment shortcut to open, delete or see
the attributes of the attachment.
Note : If the associated file is moved or deleted, the shortcut in the Attachments
pane will no longer work.
Using Photographs
You can store photographs with pieces of equipment and with sites. Photographs
can be in device independent bitmap format (extension .bmp), also JPEG, GIF, TIFF,
PCX and TARGA. You can store photographs with antennas, BTS Equipment, masts,
cabins, feeders, cell Equipment and Sites.
Associating a Photograph with Equipment
To view or associate a photo with a piece of equipment:
1. From the Database menu, point to Equipment Configuration and then click
the equipment you require.
2. On the General tab, click the Photo button.
If a photo is associated, it is shown here.
5 34 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
3. To associate a photograph with a piece of equipment, click Browse and locate
the file you require.
For example, this picture shows associating a mast with a photograph:
Associating a Photograph with a Site
To associate a photograph with a site:
1. In the Site Database window, select the required site.
2. On the General tab, click Site or Panoramic then locate the required
photograph.
Panoramic photographs can be in the form of any of the following files:
BMP
JPEG
GIF
TIFF
PCX
TARGA
If you wish to view the azimuth, the file should have one known reference
point for an azimuth.
3. For panoramic photographs:
Click a reference point in the photograph to bring up the input bearing
window.
Enter the azimuth of the reference point where the mouse was clicked, in
degrees, to reference the photograph.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 5 35
Version 4.0
You can also drag the azimuth bars for precise positioning. Additional bars
are displayed showing the facing of each cell on the site.
This picture shows associating a panoramic photograph with a site:
Using Site Acquisition Details
For proposed sites that have not yet been acquired, you can associate with the site a
radius of acceptability from the optimum location. To do this:
1. From the Site Database window, select the required site.
2. If you have not done so already, click Info>> to display the tabs.
3. Click the Misc tab.
4. Under Search Area, set an associated search radius as a percentage of the
hexagon radius (which results in a dynamic value) or as an absolute value in
metres.

5 36 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 1
Version 4.0
6 Storing and Changing Data
Overview of Changing and Storing Data
The ENTERPRISE database stores in a logical hierarchy all the items needed for the
design and build of a complete cellular network.
All the information that you add or edit in various windows in ENTERPRISE, for
example, for network elements, link information, equipment details, and so on, is
stored in the one ENTERPRISE database.
This chapter describes the following topics:
Adding and editing objects in the Site Database window
About Properties
Making changes to network elements in the Site Database window
Making global changes to network elements
Viewing and changing link information
Viewing and changing link information globally
Viewing and changing equipment details
Viewing and changing Property and contact details
Committing your changes to the database
For a description of the Site Database window and the Site Database Settings dialog
box, see Chapter 3.
6 2 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Adding and Editing Objects in the Site Database
Window
As well as using the Site Design toolbar in the Map View window to add and delete
network elements, you can also use the Site Database window.
Adding network elements always follows the network hierarchy, that is, you need
to add a Property before you can add an MSC; you need an MSC before you can add
a BSC; and you need a BSC before you can add a site.
To add network elements in the Site Database window, you need to be displaying
the Site Database by Logical Links or Location, which you do in the Site Database
Settings dialog box. For information on how to do this, see Chapter 3.
To add a network element:
1. In the left pane, click with the right mouse button on the element above the
one you wish to add.
For example, to add a BSC, click with the right mouse button on the relevant
MSC; to add a cell, click with the right mouse button on a site and so on.
Note : If the Site Database window is not displaying these items, you may
have selected to display information by physical links instead and should
change this in the Site Database Settings dialog box.
2. From the menu that appears, click Add Item, for example Add Cell.
Deleting Network Elements
When Displaying Network Elements by Logical Links
When displaying network elements by Logical Links in the Site Database window,
you can delete any network element. To do this:
In the left pane, click with the right mouse button on the element you wish to
delete and from the menu that appears, click Delete Item.
The deleted item is sent to the Wastebasket from where it can be restored or
deleted from the master database.
You can also add, copy, cut, apply and commit MSCs, BSCs, Sites, Distribution
Nodes, Cells, Cell Layers, and Repeaters in this way.
Warning : Cell Layers will only go to the wastebasket if they have been commited.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 3
Version 4.0
When Displaying Network Elements by Location
When displaying network elements by Location, you can delete a Property, and this
will delete any MSC, BSC, site and equipment on that Property. To do this:
In the left pane, click with the right mouse button on the Property you wish to
delete and from the menu that appears, click Delete Property.
Deleting Empty Properties
In all three ways of displaying network elements, you can always click with the
right mouse button on the network and choose to delete empty Properties:
You may have empty Properties because each time you create an MSC that is not
already associated with a Property, a new Property is created for you. If you then
moved the MSC to a different Property, you may have an empty Property. Similarly,
you may have an empty Property if you have deleted an MSC. Empty Properties
will show up as not having any elements underneath them in the tree, when
displayed by Logical Links, so here Property01 is empty:
Troubleshooting Adding Sites
If you get the Already in Use by Another User message, this scenario indicates what
might have occurred and how to correct it.
Two users John and Beatrice are logged into the database.
What is Happening What ENTERPRISE does
Beatrice applies but does not
commit a change to committed
site 12A.
An entry is made in Beatrice's DIFFCELLSITES table.
John deletes site 12A.
John empties his wastebasket ENTERPRISE deletes the site from the CELLSITES table and
also his entries from DIFFCELLSITES.
However, since other ENTERPRISE sessions control their
respective DIFF entries, John cannot remove these
unnecessary records on behalf of other users. This stops other
sessions' memory being out of sync with the database.
6 4 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
John tries to recreate site 12A ENTERPRISE checks to make sure that the identifier is not
already in use, but detects the unnecessary database records
and this causes the 'Already in use by another user' message.
Beatrice exits the database
John tries again to recreate site
12A but gets the same
message.
ENTERPRISE checks that the identifier is not already in use,
but detects the unnecessary database records, causing a
message 'Already in use by another user'.
Beatrice logs into the database ENTERPRISE loads all the committed data from CELLSITES
and then all the applies from DIFFCELLSITES. Since it
recognises that there are stray entries in the DIFF table, it
does not show them in the user interface, but instead flags
them for 'cleaning up' when Beatrice logs off.
Beatrice exits the database ENTERPRISE's inbuilt mechanism deletes the unwanted
entries from the DIFF table.If there are many entries, this can
cause a longer then usual delay in logging out.
John tries to recreate site 12A ASSET checks that the identifier is not already in use and it is
not, so John can recreate the site with that name.
About Properties
Because MSCs, BSCs and sites are often placed in the same location, whenever you
add one of these items, ENTERPRISE either creates a new Property for it, or adds it
to an existing Property.
A Property refers to a real estate location that is technology-independent. A Site is
parented on a Property and refers to the technology/equipment that is located at
that location.
Each MSC, BSC and site must belong to a Property and consequently will have the
same location co-ordinates and DTM height as that Property. If you did not wish
items to have the same geographical location, you would put them on different
Properties.
Using the Site Database Settings dialog box, you can change whether the Site
Database window displays:
Elements hierarchically (Logical links)
Grouped by Property showing physical links (Physical)
Grouped by Property according to location
Grouped by network
The four ways are shown here:
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 5
Version 4.0
Example of Network Displayed with Logical Links, Physical Links, Location and Network views
As with other network elements, you can add and delete Properties in the Site
Database window.
Viewing and Changing Property and Contact Details
Property addresses and information about contact persons is stored in the
ENTERPRISE database. You add addresses per Property on the Contacts tab of the
Site Database:
This tab also shows any contact persons from those that you enter in the Contact
Persons window:
Details of how to add both addresses and contact details are described below.
6 6 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Adding and Editing Property Details
To change Property details:
1. Ensure the Site Database window is displaying elements grouped under
Properties using the Site Database Settings dialog box.
2. In the left-hand pane, select a Property.
Note : If you are displaying Properties by Location and have items on that
Property, select the Property itself from the menu that appears.
3. On the Contacts tab, enter the address information you require.
4. You can also choose from a list of contact personnel that you have entered
already.
To view Property details:
1. Select a site in the left-hand pane of the Site Database.
2. Click the Addresses tab to view addresses and contacts that are currently set
for the Property on which the site is situated.
Adding, Editing and Printing Contact Persons
To add or edit contact details:
1. From the Database menu, click Contact Persons and click the Add Contact or
Edit Contact Details buttons.
2. Enter the details you wish to record then click OK.
To copy selected details to a text file:
1. In the Contact Persons dialog box, select the person or persons whose details
you want copied.
2. Click the Copy to WordPad button .
3. The selected details appear in a text file.
Making Changes to Network Elements
You can change a variety of attributes, some of which are common to all network
elements and some of which are specific to particular network elements.
Changes you make in the Site Database window are synchronised with the Map
View window and reflected there.
To make changes in the Site Database window:
1. In the Site Database window, select the element whose attributes you wish to
change.
2. Ensure you have clicked the Info button so that the window expands to show
tabs on the right-hand side containing information related to the element that
you selected.
3. Make the required changes on the tabs on the right-hand side.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 7
Version 4.0
About the Tabs on the Site Database Window
The Site Database tabs change depending on the item you have selected and the
network type that you are designing.
This section describes the tabs that are shown when you have a site selected in the
left pane.
Any other tabs that you might see are related to the specific products you have
installed. For information on those tabs, see the relevant product Help or manual.
About the Site Database General Tab
This illustration shows the General tab that is shown when a site is selected:
Site Database General tab Shown When Site is Selected
The attributes that you can see and change depend on the element selected and the
network you are using. When you have a site selected, on the General tab, you can
change the following information:
Information Description
Identity This must be a unique name for the site and cannot contain spaces.
Name This is a descriptive name for the site and can contain spaces.
Photographs You can associate a digital photograph and a scrolling digital panoramic
photograph of the site (bitmap file).
6 8 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
You can view the following information which concerns the Property where the site
is located:
Information Description
DTM This is the ground height at the site location.
If No Data is displayed, the site is off the height map data.
Actual This is the height of the site base above sea level.
If No Data is displayed, the site is off the height map data.
Location This is the location of the Property where the site is, in Longitude / Latitude (LL),
Decimal Longitude / Latitude (DLL) or Grid co-ordinates (GRID).
To change which option is shown, click the LL, DLL or GRID buttons.
Tip : To change any of these items, use the General tab shown when a Property is
displayed. See page 6-21 for information on doing this.
If the element selected is a BTS site or Repeater, you can also change the nominal
hexagon radius that is used when displaying hexagons on the Map View. The radius
is used to determine the nominal coverage area of the site used during network pre-
study phases.
About the Site Database Status Tab
On the Status tab, you can change the flags that are associated with a site. If you
have administrator permissions, you can define status flags that all site types share.
For more information on site flags, see Chapter 5.
About the Site Database Config Tab
If you select a repeater in the Site Database window, the Config tab is shown on
which you change this information:
In this pane You can
Output Signal Calculation Method Select the method that will be used to calculate the output
power.
If you select Predict received parent signal, you can edit the
receiver sensitivity threshold and the transmitter gain. If you
click the Calculate button, the receiver signal and output are
generated.
If you select Specify received parent signal, you can specify
the receiver signal and the transmitter gain.
If you select Specify power, you can specify the output power,
and set it as either ERP or EiRP.
Note: If you select either Predict received parent signal or
Specify received parent signal, the output power will be
calculated as either ERP or EiRP, depending on which is
selected.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 9
Version 4.0
RX Antenna Configuration Set up the antenna details including antenna type, azimuth,
height and mechanical tilt.
Click one of the Calculate buttons to calculate:
The azimuth from the repeater to the cell. This value is
shown in the azimuth box.
The angle of tilt. This is calculated using the difference
in the sum of ground height and antenna height and the
distance between repeater and parent cell.
TX Antenna Configuration Set up the antenna details including antenna type, azimuth,
height and mechanical tilt.
About the Site Database Addresses Tab
In the Site Database window, use the Addresses tab to view addresses and contacts
that are currently set for the Property on which the site is situated.
If you need to add or edit addresses:
1. Change the settings for the Site Database window so it displays by Property.
2. On the Contacts tab, enter the address information and choose from a list of
Contact personnel that you have entered already.
To add or edit contact details:
From the Database menu, click Contact Persons and click the Add Contact or
Edit Contact Details buttons.
About the Site Database Attachments Tab
The Attachments tab shows whether extra related information is stored with the site
in the ENTERPRISE database. For more information on using attachments, see
Chapter 5.
Note : The attributes which you can see and change depend on the element selected
and the network you are using.
About the Site Database Bcf Tab
Use the Bcf tab, shown when a site is selected in the Site Database, to add, remove or
edit site base control functions (BCFs) for a site.
A BCF is a hardware box in the network that sits between the BSC and the BTS and
handles control functions such as frequency hopping. BCFs are optional and not
needed for traffic analysis or any other calculations in ENTERPRISE.
Note : You cannot remove a BCF if it is being used by a cell.
6 10 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
You can enter the following information for a BCF in the BCF Properties pane:
In this box You can enter
IdName A unique string of a maximum length of 32 characters.
BCF Type A list of BCF types that you have defined in the BCF Types dialog box.
BCF ID A number from 0 to 9999 unique under a BSC.
Ignore this field as it is not needed.
BCF Name A string of a maximum length of 80 characters.
Info A string of a maximum length of 80 characters in which you can enter
additional information.
For information on creating BCF Types, see page 6-28.
About the Site Database Installation Tab
The Installation tab is specific to BTS sites and repeaters and enables you to record
the type of equipment at the site/repeater.
About the Site Database Miscellaneous Tab
Use the Miscellaneous tab to store comments about the site. If you have selected a
BTS site, you can also:
See the status of any coverage predictions that may exist for the site. To do
this, select an available resolution and click Display.
Set a default value for the prediction radius. This saves you time and gives
you greater flexibility. You will not need to force all predictions to be the
same radius, that is, urban sites provide smaller coverage areas than rural
sites and so can have a proportionately smaller default radius.
Set an associated search radius
About the Tabs Shown When a Cell is Selected
Information stored at the cell level differs greatly to that of the elements higher up in
the network hierarchy. This section describes the tabs shown when a cell is selected.
Note : Any further tabs that you can see are installed with different ENTERPRISE
suite products. For more information on them, see the relevant individual Help or
User Reference Guide for that product.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 11
Version 4.0
About the Cell General Tab
The information shown for a cell on the General tab in the Site Database includes the
following:
Cell Identity, the unique textual identifier of the cell
Cell Name, the optional unique identifier which could be used to store the
network cell identity
Propagation Prediction Model
Codes as follows:
For GSM For AMPS For TETRA
MNC, MCC, NCC, BCC or LAC PSID, RSID,
LocArea
MNC, MCC, NCC, BCC or
LAC
Base Station Identity Code
(BSIC)consisting of Network Colour
Code (0-7) and Base Station Colour
Code
SAT, DCC, DVCC Colour Code
About the AMPS Colour Codes
This table shows a brief description of the AMPS codes:
Name Description
Supervisory Audio Tone (SAT) Sent on the traffic channel and is used to provide link continuity
between the mobile and the base station.
Three SAT frequencies are defined; 5970 Hz, 6000 Hz and
6030 Hz.
The mobile knows which SAT to expect by using a field called
SAT Colour Code (SCC) which has a binary value of 00, 01 or
10 for the respective frequency.
Digital Verification Colour Code
(DVCC)
Used in D_AMPS.
This is an 8 bit code sent by the base station in initialisation
messages. It is stored at the mobile station and used to check
the Coded Digital Verification Colour Code.
Digital Colour Code (DCC) Used in AMPS.
This is an 8-bit code sent by the base station in initialisation
messages. It is stored at the mobile station and used to check
the Coded Digital Verification Colour Code.
6 12 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About the Cell Config Tab
The information on the Cell Config tab shown when a cell is selected in the Site
Database shows the associated set of equipment settings for the cell. These settings
can either be inherited from an ARCHITECT configuration or specified individually
from the following:
Cell equipment details
DTX state and the voice activity factor (not AMPS)
If DTX is enabled for a cell then a Voice Activity Factor must be set (1.0 being
constant and 0.0 the lowest). DTX is considered during the creation of
interference tables and the frequency planning process.
FCC Category
If FCC is enabled for a cell then the FCC category must be selected.
Note : This option is only available if you have ASSET installed.
This picture shows an example of the Cell Config tab:
Cell Config tab
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 13
Version 4.0
About the Antenna Config Tab
The Antenna Config tab on the Site Database is displayed when a cell is selected and
shows what antenna is used on each site and also the information about that
antenna. Information on the tab includes:
Antenna slot details
Antenna type and correction factor
Feeder type and length
Azimuth in degrees from north
Mechanical down tilt
Height
Distributed antenna location
About the Cell Exceptions Tab
During the frequency planning processes, constraints are defined at a general level
for the frequency separations. If you need more control, individual exceptions can
be made on a cell by cell basis.
When you have a cell selected in the Site Database window, click the Exceptions tab.
New exception relationships are created in only one direction. If you require mutual
exceptions you must create the reverse exception manually.
The exception defines the minimum difference between the carrier number of the
current cell and the selected exception cell. For example, if the current cell uses
carrier number 8 and the separation is 2, the exception cell cannot be allocated
carriers 7, 8, or 9.
About the Cell BSS Tab
Use the BSS tab, shown when a cell is selected in the Site Database, for editing these
parameters for cells:
In this box You can enter
Cell Type A number from 0 to 9999.
Segment ID A number from 1 to 128 indicating the segment. A segment is a group of BTSs
with the same BCCH.
Segment Name A string with a maximum length of 15, indicating the segment name.
6 14 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About the Tabs Shown When a Cell Layer is Selected
Information stored at the cell layer level differs greatly to that of the elements higher
up in the network hierarchy. This section describes the tabs shown when a subcell
(cell layer) is selected in the Site Database:
Subcell selected in the Site Database
About the Cell Layer General Tab
When a cell layer (subcell) is selected in the Site Database window, it is possible to
change the following information on the General tab:
In this box You can
SubCell ID and Name Enter unique names for the cell layer
CS Traffic View or edit the circuit switched traffic carried.
This box allows the expected traffic for the cell layer to be set (in
Erlangs). When you analyse a traffic raster and choose to Apply the
Traffic, this is where the values are stored.
Prediction Model Select Enable and choose a different model from those shown to
override the parent cells propagation model, if you want to do so.
Cell Layer Parameters Restrict the coverage that a cell provides by defining the:
Signal Offset (Minimum allowable signal strength) at which the
cell layer will be used. The cell layer can still be used down to the
signal threshold if coverage is not provided by another cell with
higher signal strength.
TA Threshold (Timing Advance Threshold). For a cell using
extended range where two timeslots are in use the maximum
timing advance is 133, otherwise the maximum is normally 63.
Signal Threshold. This value in dBm, relates to the lowest signal
strength the cell layer will be used at, although it can be used
down to Minimum Acceptable Signal Strength if coverage is not
being provided by another cell with a higher signal strength.
This restricts the radial distance of coverage provided by the cell to
whichever of these parameters is reached first.
These parameters may be used to restrict the influence of a cell on any
surrounding cells, thereby possibly reducing the potential for
interference.
Dynamic Cell Layer
Parameters
Target Pathloss. If two cell layers have been defined with one being
given a higher priority than the other and assigned to separate sites with
a single cell, either the Target Signal Strength or Target Pathloss can be
used to adjust the coverage provided by the sites. If you select the
Dynamic option, you can enter the Target Pathloss that will be used.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 15
Version 4.0
About the Cell Layer Hopping Tab
When a cell layer (subcell) is selected in the Site Database window, it is possible to
change the hopping information on the Hopping tab.
Choose whether or not to enable Frequency Hopping. This does not apply to AMPS
networks. Also, choose the hopping type.
If any carrier layer is to use frequency hopping, the cell layer must first have
frequency hopping applied or committed.
This table gives information about the types of hopping you can select on this tab:
Hopping Type Information
Baseband You must allocate individual carriers available to the hopping sequence on the
Carriers tab.
Synthesised
or
Site
You can enter the hopping sequence number, the MAIO Offset and the MAIO
Step.
When planning synthesiser hopping, you should use Mobile Allocation lists (MA
lists) and therefore will not need to allocate carriers because all the carriers in an
MA List will be used, that is, they are all implicitly allocated.
If you have allocated a mobile allocation (MA) list, and then change from
synthesiser or site hopping to baseband or non-hopping, the MA list is only
temporarily removed. It is restored if you later revert to synthesiser or site
hopping. This enables you to switch between hopping types without having to
reallocate the MA list.
About the Cell Layer Carriers Tab
This topic describes what you can use the Carriers tab to do when a cell layer
(subcell) is selected in the Site Database window. You can:
Choose to view a list of carriers or the carriers as used in the re-use pattern
Enable hopping on carrier layers
Allocate or de-allocate carrier layers on the selected cell layer
View or change the status of all the carriers on the selected carrier layer
Note : You cannot add or remove carrier layers on this tab. To do this, from the
Options menu, click Carrier Layers.
6 16 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
The Cell Layer Carriers Tab
Carrier Layers Pane
You can allocate or de-allocate carrier layers on the selected cell layer. However, you
cannot add or remove carrier layers on this tab. To do this, from the Options menu,
click Carrier Layers.
When you have selected a carrier layer, the other items shown relate to that layer. If
you select the Allocated check box, the layer is allocated. If you select the Hopping
check box, hopping is enabled on the layer.
Note : A layer must be allocated before any other parameters can be set for the layer,
including carriers.
When synthesised hopping is selected in the Hopping tab, both normal traffic
channels and MALists are available for allocation in the carriers tab. However, if site
hopping is selected in the Hopping tab, then normal traffic carrier layers are not
available for allocation but MALists are.
If the carriers are to be automatically assigned by the automatic frequency planner,
you must enter a number in the Carriers Required Per Layer box. The number
cannot be greater than the maximum constraint specified in the carrier layer
definition from the Options menu.
The Total TRX Alloc box contains the total transceivers for the whole cell layer.
If you want to set this to be a ratio of the total carriers that are assigned for each
subcell in a filter, you can do this globally using the Ratio to the Total Carriers
Allocated for Synthesised Frequency Hopping box in the Global Editor. For
information on how to do this, see page 6-19.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 17
Version 4.0
Typically, you can obtain the TRX requirement as a result of the capacity planning
process using the ASSET Traffic Wizard. For more information on this, see the
ASSET User Reference Guide .
Carriers Pane
The Carriers pane displays the status of all the carriers on the selected carrier layer
either as a list or in the re-use pattern. Depending on whether you want to see the
carriers in a list or in their frequency group, you can display this pane by clicking
the appropriate button:
List View
Group View
List View
You can view carriers on the Cell Layer Carriers tab in list view (as shown in the
above picture) or group view.
In list view, you can select one carrier available on the cell layer or multiple carriers
by holding down CTRL and selecting the required carriers. Then you can change
them to:
Status Description
Allocated The carrier is allocated but may be affected by any automatic carrier
allocation.
Allocated & fixed The carrier is allocated and will not be altered by any automatic carrier
allocation unless requested to do so in the AFP.
Forbidden The carrier cannot be allocated by any means unless the forbidden flag is
removed.
State Whether the carrier is allocated or not.
You cannot make an adjacent allocation on the same cell, so if you want to use the
adjacent carrier, you must de-allocate the original carrier first.
Note : The Total TRX Alloc box contains the total transceivers for the whole cell
layer.
Group View
You can view carriers on the Cell Layer Carriers tab in group view or list view. To
switch to group view, click the Group View button.
In Group View, the re-use pattern is shown with the background colour indicating
the carrier's allocation state, where:
This colour Indicates
Red Forbidden
Green Allocated
Cyan Fixed
White Available
6 18 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
This picture shows an example:
Displaying Carrier Allocations in Re-use Patterns
To change a carrier:
Click in the grid square and select the check box next to Fixed, Forbidden or
Alloc, as required:
To expand the tab to see only this pane:
Click the Maximise button .
Note : If you want to add or change the re-use pattern, use the Carrier Layers dialog
box. For information on this, see the ASSET User Reference Guide.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 19
Version 4.0
Setting a Fraction of the Assigned Carriers
By using the Global Editor, you can set the Total TRX Alloc on a synthesised
hopping carrier layer used on all subcells in a filter, to be a ratio of the total carriers
allocated.
1. Ensure your subcell(s) has synthesised hopping enabled, by selecting it on the
Hopping tab of the Site Database.
2. Ensure the carrier layer has hopping enabled, by selecting the required layer
and selecting the Hopping checkbox, on the Carriers tab of the Site Database.
3. Ensure you have carriers allocated to the carrier layer for the subcell, on the
Carriers tab of the Site Database.
4. From the Site Database, click Global Edit to open the Global Editor.
5. Select the required filter and on the Cell Layer tab, select the required cell
layer.
6. Select the Total TRX Alloc check box then in the Ratio to the Total Carriers
Allocated for Synthesised Frequency Hopping box, enter the ratio you require
(between 0 and 1).
7. Click Apply.
Now, when you look at a subcell in the filter that you selected, and on the
Carriers tab, view the relevant carrier layer, you will see the Total TRX Alloc
is different to the Total Carriers available by the ratio you specified.
For example, if there are 4 carriers available on a subcell and you set the ratio
in the Global Editor to 0.5, then the value of Total TRX Alloc for the subcell
will be 2.
About the Cell Layer Antenna/TRX Tab
When a cell layer (subcell) is selected in the Site Database window, you can use the
Cell Layer Antenna/TRX tab to view and define from which of the predefined slots
the particular cell layer will radiate and you can also set the radiated power.
If you have one slot, and you select it, you can view and edit any of these:
PA Output
Radiated power in EiRP
Radiated power in ERP
These are displayed in the Transmitter pane. When you edit one of these values, the
other two values are calculated automatically. So if you want a particular EiRP, you
can enter it, and ENTERPRISE will calculate what the PA Output power should be,
using the gains from the Antennas database and the losses from the Feeders
database.
If you have multiple slots, only the PA Output is shown and can be edited.
6 20 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
You can also edit the EGPRS/ECSD pane, giving the 8-PSK Average Power
Decrease (APD). By editing this, the Transmitter PA Output will automatically be
decreased by that amount. For example, if the PA Output is 50.00 dB and you enter
10.00 dB into the APD, then the PA Output will be 40.00 dB.
The Transceiver pane is unavailable if no ARCHITECT configuration is being used.
About the Cell Layer Neighbours Tab
When you have a cell layer (subcell) selected in the Site Database window, you can
view and change neighbour relationships on the Neighbour tab. You can use a filter
to limit the display to a chosen cell layer.
Click Add to create new neighbour relationships. New neighbour relationships are
created in only one direction. If you require mutual neighbours you must create the
reverse relationship manually or use Neighbour Analysis.
You can also specify a handover margin (dB) against each neighbour relationship.
To do this, enter the new required margin and click the Set button.
The GPRS Enabled column shows whether GPRS is enabled on each of the
neighbour sub-cells and is a read only item.
About the Cell Layer (E)GPRS Tab
In the (E)GPRS tab in the Site Database window you can assign cell-layers as GPRS
or EGPRS.
Enable: Description:
Enable GPRS Enabling the GPRS will allow you to edit the channel code scheme
and also enable the EGPRS and change its parameters.
Tip : One Coding Scheme must always be selected, so if you want to
change to another Coding Scheme, select it then deselect the first
check box.
Enable EGPRS Enabling EGPRS allows you to edit it's parameters and the
percentage of EGPRS 8-PSK.
Tip : For all EDGE enabled sub-cells, at least one of the Link
Adaption Families needs to be selected.
Dedicated PBCCH If you want to allocate another BCCH timeslot for packet data control,
select the Use Dedicated PBCCH checkbox.
In the Traffic pane on this tab, you can edit the Total GPRS + EGPRS traffic, which is
the value of the total Packet Switched Traffic. Also if you have the EGPRS enabled
you can edit the percentage of (E)GPRS 8-PSK which is the traffic mix, an estimate of
the percentage of the (E)GPRS traffic that is using the 8-PSK modulation, and
therefore the lower output power. A floating point value can be entered between 0
and 100. These values will be taken into account when Interference Arrays are
calculated, if the Use Traffic check box on the Interference tab of the Array Settings
dialog box is selected. Values for the traffic mix can also be applied to the sub-cells
by the Traffic Analysis.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 21
Version 4.0
The GPRS and EGPRS traffic carried by the cell layer is defined during the traffic
planning process. For more information on this, see the ASSET User Reference
Guide.
Adding a GPRS Subcell in the Site Database Window
Note : All these parameters can also be edited in the Global Editor.
About the Cell Layer HSCD/ECSD Tab
On the HSCD/ECSD tab, you can enable the ECSD and edit the Traffic. In the Total
HSCSD + ECSD edit box, you should enter the sum of the HSCD and ECSD traffic
values in Erlangs. The % of ECSD 8-PSK is the estimate of the percentage of ECSD
traffic which is using 8-PSK modulation and therefore the lower power. It takes a
floating point value between 0 and 100.
Note : These parameters can also be edited in the Global Editor.
About the Tabs Shown When A Property is Selected
In the left pane of the Site Database window, you can display Properties either by
location or by physical links.
To select a Property when the site database is displaying by location, click the
Property.
To select a Property when the site database is displaying physical links, click it, and
if there is equipment associated with it, select the Property in the menu that appears:
6 22 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
When a Property is selected in the Site Database window, these tabs are shown:
On the General tab, enter or change the Property ID, location, available mast
space and ground height as required.
On the Status tab, you can change the flags that are associated with a
Property. If you have administrator permissions, you can define status flags
that all site types share. For more information on site flags, see Chapter 5.
One of the status flags is Candidate Status showing whether the Property is a
Nominal, Candidate or Not Used. You cannot change the value of the
Candidate Status flag here. You change its value by editing the Property in
the Map View window.
On the Contacts tab, enter the address information needed and select a
contact:
On the Search Area tab:
Choose if you want search areas to be locked or editable.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 23
Version 4.0
For a Property that has an existing search area, you can choose to resize it
in the Map View window, or check the Override check box on this tab and
type in a new search area.
Add any further comments.
About Setting The Parameters For A Logical Network
You can set the parameters for a Logical Network in the Site Database. This section
describes the tabs shown at the following levels of a Logical Network:
The Logical Network
The PLMN
The Logical Node
For information on how to create a Logical Network see Chapter 4.
About The Tabs Shown When A Logical Network Is Selected
This table shows the tabs displayed when a Logical Network is selected in the Site
Database:
On this Tab: You can:
General tab View and edit the Network Identity
Add and edit any comments that apply to the Logical Network
View the history of the Logical Network
Status tab Change the flags that are associated with a site. If you have
administrator permissions, you can define status flags that all site
types share. For more information on site flags, see Chapter 5.
About The Tabs Shown When A PLMN Is Selected
This table shows the tabs displayed when a PLMN is selected in the Site Database:
On this Tab: You can:
General tab View and edit the PLMN Identity
Add and edit any comments that apply to the PLMN
Enter the PLMN Network Parameters
View the history of the PLMN
Status tab Change the flags that are associated with a site. If you have
administrator permissions, you can define status flags that all site
types share. For more information on site flags, see Chapter 5.
6 24 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About The Tabs Shown When A Logical Node Is Selected
This table shows the tabs displayed when a Logical Node is selected in the Site
Database:
On this Tab: You can:
General tab View and edit the Network Identity
Add and edit any comments that apply to the Logical Network
View the history of the Logical Network
Location tab View the location of the Property on the map and also the ground height.
This tab is shown when a logical node is selected in the Site Database
and is present on all logical nodes and derived network elements.
Address tab View addresses and contacts that are currently set for the Property on
which the site is situated.
If you need to add or edit addresses:
Change the settings for the Site Database window so it displays by
Property.
On the Contacts tab, enter the address information and choose from a list
of Contact personnel that you have entered already.
To add or edit contact details:
From the Database menu, click Contact Persons and click the Add
Contact or Edit Contact Details buttons.
Traffic tab Add and remove from the list of traffic, and amend the Traffic Parameters
for each connection.
This tab shows when a logical node and each type deriving from it is
selected in the Site Database. It shows the list of traffic currently on the
node.
A similar Traffic tab appears when you select a UMTS cell. Again you can
add and remove traffic from a cell and amend the parameters.
Status tab Change the flags that are associated with a site. If you have administrator
permissions, you can define status flags that all site types share. For
more information on site flags, see Chapter 5.
Making Global Changes to Network Elements
Changing information for a large number of sites can be a very lengthy process
when performed manually. To avoid this, you can use the Global Editor to change
all sites identified by a filter.
To use the Global Editor:
1. In the Site Database window, click Global Edit.
2. Select the appropriate filter.
3. Select the items that you want to change for all the network elements in this
filter.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 25
Version 4.0
The global editor window consists of several tabs corresponding to different data
types, including diversity information in some cases. Not all data types are relevant
to every network element type.
This picture shows the Cell tab in the Global Editor:
Global Editor
Warning : If you check the Use DTM Heights check box on the General tab, this will
overwrite any actual heights set for items in the selected filter with DTM Heights.
When you have selected this check box and Applied the change, you cannot recover
your actual heights. However, you may want to use this if you have not set any
actual heights and want to quickly add DTM Heights to all of the items in the filter.
After you have made all the required modifications, you can then apply them to the
database by clicking Apply. This process may take a while depending on the
number of changes you made. When the changes have been applied, the global
editor window closes.
If you wish all other users to see the changes made it is necessary to Commit each
site individually or Commit All. For more information on committing changes, see
page 6-37.
Note : Please pay special attention when globally changing Cell LAC, allocating and
removing cell layers, and with cell layer model override. These may not behave
quite as you might expect.
6 26 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
List of Data Types You Can Modify in the Global Editor
Before you can edit equipment and models in the Global Editor, ensure you have
defined them first. See Chapter 2 for more information on how to do this.
The following table lists the data types that you can modify using the Global Editor.
If you have 3g installed there are four other tabs included to the list. For more
information on these tabs refer to the 3g User Reference Guide.
On this tab You can modify
Status Any of your status flags.
General Hexagon radius, Comment, Prediction radius, Search area radius (metres),
contact details and location
Warning : If you check the Use DTM Heights check box on the General tab, this
will overwrite any actual heights set for items in the selected filter with DTM
Heights. When you have selected this check box and Applied the change, you
cannot recover your actual heights.
However, you may want to use this if you have not set any actual heights and
want to quickly add DTM Heights to all of the items in the filter.
Cell Propagation model, Mobile Network Code (MNC), Mobile Country Code (MCC),
Network Colour Code (NCC), Base station Colour Code (BCC), LAC
Antenna Antenna type, Height, Mechanical tilt, Azimuth, DTX state (downlink only and the
voice activity factor), Feeder type and length
Installation Mast type, Cabin type, Site equipment type
Miscellaneous Handover margin, Exception separations
Cell layer Cell layer allocate / remove, Model override, Signal offset, Signal threshold,
Timing advance threshold
Cell frequency hopping enable / disable, Hopping sequence number, Hopping
type (Base band, synthesiser or site)
Total TRX Allocation
CS Traffic
PA Output or, if you only have one antenna slot in the cell layer you are
modifying, EiRP or ERP
Note : The Ratio to the Total Carriers Allocated for Synthesised Frequency
Hopping box enables a fraction of the total carriers that are assigned to be
allocated to 'Total TRX Alloc' for each subcell when synthesised frequency
hopping is on.
So to enable this, ensure your subcells have synthesised hopping enabled.
Ensure the carrier layer has hopping enabled, and that you have carriers
assigned to the csubecell. Then in the Global Editor, on the Cell Layer tab, enter
the ratio you require (between 0 and 1). So, if there are 4 carriers available on a
subcell and the ratio in the Global Editor is set to 0.5, then the value of Total TRX
Alloc for the subcell will be 2.
For setting MAIO values globally, you can use the MAIO Planning Tool. For more
information, see the ASSET User Reference Guide.
Carrier layer Carrier layer allocate / remove, Carrier layer frequency hopping enable / disable,
Carriers required, Fix all allocated, Remove all allocated, Un-fix all allocated,
Forbidden carriers
TRX/Antenna The TRX group per cell layer as slots and enable them.
2.5G Enable GPRS and EGPRS, use dedicated PBBCH, Coding scheme (GPRS),
GPRS Traffic, HSCSD Traffic, specify the Link Adaption families
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 27
Version 4.0
Note : To be able to set the equipment and models to cells you must define them
first. For more information on how to do this see chapter 2.
Viewing and Changing Link Information
Use the Link Information database window to plan microwave links supported by
the entire site network. A microwave link is composed of two LinkEnds, each of
which is associated with a particular site.
To access the Links Database you can do one of the following:
From the Database menu, click Links.
You can modify the attributes of individual links such as frequency and climatic
region. Click the Info button to expand the window and reveal the tabs headed
LinkEndA, LinkEndB, Profile and Info.
Whenever a new site is created two default LinkEnds are created, one associated
with the site and the other associated with the new sites Parent. A microwave link
is then established between these two LinkEnds.
An example of the Link Information window is shown below:
Links Information Window
Note : If you have CONNECT installed, the window shown will be different. See the
CONNECT User Reference Guide for more information.
6 28 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About the Tabs in the Link Information Window
This table describes the tabs of the Link Information window:
Tab Name Description
LinkEndA and
LinkEndB
Describes the characteristics of the two link ends that comprise the link.
For example, transmit power, antenna and feeder details.
Profiles Shows the available height and clutter profile of the links with Fresnel
zones.
Rainfall Set rainfall and climatic conditions either using ITU-defined Climatic
Regions or by entering them manually
Availability Shows the figures for the links availability, power budget, losses and
multipath fading. These are calculated using the ITUs definitions of the
various factors.
About the Link Global Editor
As with the Site Database, there is a Global Editor for the Links Database. This
enables you to assign information to all links in the database that are included in the
filter selected at the top of the Global Editor.You can apply connection and link end
information and rainfall data.
To use the Global Editor:
1. In the Link Database window, click Global Edit.
2. Select the appropriate filter.
3. Select the items that you want to change for all the links in this filter.
Opening the Link Database at a Particular Link
You can open the Link Database at a particular link. To do this:
1. Ensure you have the Link Database check box selected on the General tab of
the Preferences dialog box. For information on setting preferences, see
Chapter 2.
2. From the Map View window, select a link.
3. Hold down the Control key on your keyboard and click the link.
4. The Link Database appears with the chosen link selected.
5. Click Info>> to display information about this link.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 29
Version 4.0
Defining and Removing BCF Types
To define and remove BCF types, use the BCF Types dialog box. This picture shows
an example:
BCF Types dialog box
Click the Default button to use any templates that might have been predefined.
Click Restore to replace a selected BCF Type with a BCF Type from the database.
Defining a BCF Type
To define a type of BCF:
1. From the Options menu, click BCF Types.
2. In the BCF Types dialog box that appears, click Add and enter the
information required about the BCF type. This table shows what you can
enter:
In this box You can enter
Name A unique name for the BCF type, of a maximum 32 characters.
Combiner Type A BCF type description of a maximum of 32 characters.
Max BTS The maximum number of BTSs that the BCF can serve, between 0
and 99.
Max TRX The maximum number of TRXs that the BCF can control, between 0
and 99.
NMS Code
Ignore this field as it is not needed.
The created BCF Type is automatically applied to the database.
3. Click Commit, to commit your addition to the database.
Removing a BCF Type
To remove a BCF type:
In the BCF Types dialog box, select the required BCF type and click Remove.
You cannot remove a BCF Type if it is used by any BCF.
6 30 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Why Store Equipment Details in ENTERPRISE?
ENTERPRISE not only stores the logical configuration of the cellular or fixed
network but also the physical configuration by storing the various types of
equipment used. Store libraries of equipment details in ENTERPRISE to:
Keep the network components details easily accessible
Eliminate the need for a separate database
Eliminate potential errors by referring to an equipment definition rather than
having duplicates
Eliminating errors by having detailed parameters held against each
equipment component
Use the complete equipment inventory to accurately calculate the radiating
characteristics (for example EiRP) of the site
Attach photographs to each component for easy identification
Viewing and Changing Equipment Details
When you have added an equipment type, it appears in a list in the Site Database
window. You can then choose to apply it to the site, cell or cell layer, as appropriate.
The default type for all equipment types is Unknown, which uses default
parameters for any calculations that require equipment data.
Ensure your data is accurate and review it regularly to ensure that the most up-to-
date agreed values are being used for the network design.
To view, add and change equipment types:
1. From the Database menu, point to Equipment Configuration, click the
appropriate option, and then click Add.
2. Enter the information required and click Apply or Commit.
About Viewing and Changing Antennas and MW Antennas
As antennas are important elements of a network, many parameters can be held
against each antenna including:
Horizontal and vertical radiation patterns (masks)
Manufacturer name
Polarisation type (vertical / horizontal / cross polar)
Tilt method (mechanical / electrical)
Other data automatically calculated from the antenna patterns is:
Horizontal and vertical beamwidths
Electrical tilt angle if electrical tilt is present
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 31
Version 4.0
Normally you would not create antennas but import them into ENTERPRISE using
an antenna definition file supplied by a manufacturer.
However, if you do want to create or edit an antenna you can do so. For a
description of the Antennas and MW Antennas windows, see Chapter 3.
The following sections apply to both Antennas and MW Antennas.
Importing Antennas and MW Antennas
To import antennas and microwave antennas:
1. From the File menu, point to Import, Project Data then click PlaNet/EET.
2. On the Antenna tab, select the Antenna checkbox then click Add to navigate
to the location where your antennas are located.
3. Select the *.txt file you require.
4. Select the Add to All Projects check box if you want to make the antennas
available to all projects in the database.
5. Click the Import button.
Adding Antennas and MW Antennas To The Antenna Database
To add antennas and microwave antennas to the antenna database:
1. Ensure you have write access to the antenna database.
2. From the Database menu, point to Equipment Configuration and click
Antennas. The Antennas window displays a tree list of folders.
3. Select the current project folder you want to add antennas to and click the
right mouse button. From the menu that appears, select New Antenna. The
antenna will appear in the tree under the folder you selected.
Note : If you have the correct privileges, you can also add antennas to all
projects.
4. Select the new antenna and add the required information on the tabs
including:
On the General tab, entering a name (maximum length of 18 characters)
On the Costs tab, adding costing information
On the Mask tab, choosing a Vertical or Horizontal radiation pattern and
editing the losses for different values of antenna azimuth (or elevation).
These losses are the reduction in antenna gain from the antenna patterns
point of maximum gain.
Note : You can define the radiation patterns to an accuracy of 0.01 degrees.
5. When finished, click Apply, Commit or Restore.
6 32 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Adding Folders To The Antennas Database
To add folders to the antenna database:
1. Ensure you have write access to the antenna database.
2. From the Database menu, point to Equipment Configuration and click
Antennas. The Antennas window displays a tree list of folders.
3. Select the All Projects folder or the current Project folder.
4. Click the right mouse button and from the menu that appears, select New
Folder.
5. In the dialog box that appears, enter the name of the folder and click OK.
6. When finished, click Apply, Commit or Restore.
Editing Antennas and MW Antennas
To edit an existing antenna:
1. Ensure you have write access to the antenna database.
2. From the Database menu, point to Equipment Configuration and click
Antennas.
3. The Antennas window displays a tree list of folders. Extend the tree to view
the antennas available to the current project.
4. Select the antenna you wish to edit and add the required information on the
tabs including:
On the General tab, entering a name (maximum length of 18 characters)
On the Costs tab, adding costing information
On the Mask tab, choosing a Vertical or Horizontal radiation pattern and
editing the losses for different values of antenna azimuth (or elevation).
These losses are the reduction in antenna gain from the antenna patterns
point of maximum gain.
Note : If you enter anything other than whole or half degrees for the angle,
ENTERPRISE rounds to the nearest half degree.
5. When finished, click Apply, Commit or Restore.
Deleting Antennas and MW Antennas From The Antenna Database
You can delete antennas from the folders in the antenna database. To do this:
1. Ensure you have write access to the antenna database.
2. From the Database menu, point to Equipment Configuration and click
Antennas.
3. The Antennas window displays a tree list of folders. Extend the tree to view
the antennas available to the current project.
4. Select the antenna you want to remove. Click the right mouse button and
from the menu that appears, click Delete.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 33
Version 4.0
5. When finished, click Apply, Commit or Restore.
Restoring Antennas and MW Antennas
You can restore antennas by selecting the antennas from the Wastebasket. For more
information on how to do this, see chapter 3.
Deleting Folders From The Antenna Database
You can delete folders from the antenna database, although you can not delete the
All Projects and the current Project folders.
Warning : When folders are deleted, they cannot be restored.
Note : This will delete all unused antennas under the folder, but the unused
antennas can be restored.
To delete folders from the All Projects or Current Project files:
1. Ensure you have write access to the antenna database.
2. From the Database menu, point to Equipment Configuration and click
Antennas.
3. Select the folder you want to delete. Click the right mouse button and from
the menu that appears select Delete.
4. When finished, click Apply, Commit or Restore
Note : A folder cannot be deleted if it contains antennas that are being used.
A message will appear in the Message Log to tell you it Cannot Delete
Equipment Layer.
About Viewing and Changing Site Equipment
You can enter a description of the site equipment, that is, the transmitters
themselves, in the BTS Equipment window, and can include details of part ID, a
photo, PA Output Power (minimum and maximum) and Carrier Spacing (minimum
site spacing and cell spacing).
If the value for the PA output is set in the Site Database to a value outside the
allowed range for the appropriate transmitter, as set here, the value is adjusted by
ENTERPRISE to the maximum or minimum as required, and the Message Log
informs you of this change.
For a description of the BTS window, see Chapter 3.
6 34 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Creating and Editing Site Equipment
To create and edit site equipment:
1. Ensure you have write access to the BTS database.
2. From the Database menu, point to Equipment Configuration and click BTSs.
3. The BTSs window displays the BTSs available to the current project.
4. To add a new BTS:
Click Add.
A BTS with a default name appears in the list.
Select the new BTS and add the required data on the tabs.
5. To edit a BTS:
Select it and change the required data on the tabs.
6. When finished, click Apply, Commit or Restore.
In the same way, to remove a BTS, click it in the list then click Remove.
About Viewing and Changing Cell Equipment
The cell equipment feature allows you to model RF components which do not come
under any of the predefined categories, for example, Hybrid Combiners and
Attenuators. The characteristics of the cell equipment are entered in the cell
equipment database including part ID, description, photo and equipment Loss ( in
dB).
The default value for equipment loss in the Unknown cell equipment type is zero.
For a description of the Cell Equipment window, see Chapter 3.
Creating Cell Equipment
To create and edit cell equipment:
1. Ensure you have write access to the cell equipment database.
2. From the Database menu, point to Equipment Configuration and click Cell
Equipment.
The Cell Equipment window displays the cell equipment available to the
current project.
3. To add a new piece of equipment:
Click Add.
An item with a default name appears in the list.
Select the new item and add the required data on the tabs.
4. To edit a piece of equipment:
Select the item you wish to edit and change the required data on the tabs.
5. When finished, click Apply, Commit or Restore.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 35
Version 4.0
Similarly, you can click the piece you wish to remove and click Remove.
About Viewing and Changing Feeders
The characteristics of feeders entered in the feeder database are part ID, photo,
description, frequency MHz, loss dB and total connector loss dB/M.
Default values for loss and total connector loss, set in unknown feeder type are zero.
For a description of the Feeder window, see Chapter 3.
Creating and Editing Feeders
To create and edit feeders:
1. Ensure you have write access to the feeder database.
2. From the Database menu, point to Equipment Configuration and click
Feeders.
3. The Feeders window displays the feeders available to the current project.
4. To add a new feeder:
Click Add.
A feeder with a default name appears in the list.
Select the new feeder and add the required data on the tabs.
5. To edit a feeder:
Select the feeder you wish to edit and change the required data on the tabs.
6. When finished, click Apply, Commit or Restore.
In the same way, to remove a feeder, click it in the list then click Remove.
About Viewing and Changing Cabins
Cabin characteristics are part ID, photo and description, supplier and cost, length,
width, height and weight. This picture shows an example:
Adding a Cabin Photograph
6 36 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About Viewing and Changing Masts
Mast characteristics are part ID, photo, description, supplier and cost details, and
structure height and weight.
About Viewing and Changing Equipment Suppliers Details
You can enter the names, addresses and other contact details for equipment
suppliers:
Adding Equipment Suppliers
To add a new equipment supplier:
1. From the Database menu, click Equipment Suppliers.
2. Click Add and enter the required details then click OK.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 37
Version 4.0
When you have entered suppliers, you can choose which supplier applies to each
piece of equipment in all other dialog boxes, such as those for antennas shown here:
Making Changes to the Database
You can choose whether changes you make are seen:
Only by you
or
By other people
This means that you can test out your changes before you make them available to
anyone else.
Making Changes That Are Seen Only By You
To ensure changes are seen only by you:
In the current window or dialog box, click Apply.
Changes are made only to your personal area of the database, that is,
whenever you are logged into your account, you see the changes you have
made.
6 38 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Making Changes That Are Seen By Others
To make your changes available to other people:
1. Ensure you have clicked Apply and have tested your changes privately.
2. Be sure that you want to make this change available to all users.
3. Click Commit or Commit All (to commit many changes in one action).
By committing, you store your changes in the master database which is seen
by all.
In summary, Apply and Commit both store data in the database but only Commit
makes that data visible to all users. Applied changes are only visible to the
individual who made the change.
What Things are Applied and Committed?
This table shows which items you can use Apply and Commit on, which items are
Applied automatically and which items have no Apply and Commit procedure
because they are written immediately to the database:
Items that need to be
Applied and Committed
Items that are Applied
Automatically
Items Whose Changes are Written
Immediately to the Database
(no Apply and Commit procedure)
Filters
Properties
Sites
Links
Equipment
Groups
Carrier layers
Cell layers
Terminal Type
Hexagon Radius
Location Areas
All objects created in the
Site Database window and
Map View window
You can then choose
whether to commit these
items or not.
Contacts
Carriers
Coverage Thresholds
Channel to Transceiver maps
Example of Using Apply and Commit
This example demonstrates using Apply and Commit and the order in which you
must Commit.
You are trying to improve the situation in an area and want to keep your changes
private until you have verified that they will improve the situation. So, you add a
propagation model (NewModel) and click Apply.
You then add a site and specify that it uses NewModel. You add a cell to the new
site. You do not need to Apply as new items created in the Site Database window
are automatically applied. You change the name of a cell and click Apply.
All these changes are made to your private area of the database. That is, people
simultaneously using the same data will not see these changes; they will only see
data that has been officially committed to the master engineering database.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 6 39
Version 4.0
After testing, you decide to Commit these changes to the database. You must do this
in a logical order. That is, you cannot commit the site as it uses an uncommitted
propagation model.
The order for committing in the above example would be:
1. Commit the propagation model.
2. Commit the Site.
3. Commit the Cell.
Troubleshooting Applying and Committing
If you want to commit an object, all the associated objects that it references, such as
cell layers, must also have been committed since they were last changed. Similarly, a
cell cannot be committed if the antenna or model it uses has not yet been committed.
Common Apply and Commit problems include:
If you apply a new carrier to a carrier layer, then try to apply and commit a
cell layer using the new carrier, you cannot because the new carrier does not
exist to everyone.
Accidentally committing changes that are personal changes, for example,
filters. The global view then becomes untidy and other people start deleting
your filters.
Removing a carrier layer from a cell layer, causing all cells that use that cell
layer to become applied.

6 40 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 7 1
Version 4.0
7 Importing and Exporting
About Importing and Exporting
Using importing and exporting functions provided by ENTERPRISE, you can
transfer data between normally incompatible software packages. This chapter
describes the procedures for importing and exporting data, and the data formats
that you can use.
Because each package models data differently, there will always be some
assumptions made when importing and exporting. For example, the concept of cell
layers does not exist in NEPTUNE standalone or PlaNet. So, if you exported from
ENTERPRISE to either of these formats then created a new database and imported
your data, only a default cell layer would be created, that is, you would have lost
information compared to the original.
Warning : This means that you cannot recreate your original database from
exported information. The only way to back up your database is to do so at database
level. For information on this, see your Oracle database administration
documentation and alsopage 7-9 of this manual.
As well as describing the formats for importing and exporting data, this chapter
describes how to import and export equipment.
Overview of Importing Data
You can import data from these formats:
ENTERPRISE
GSM
NEPTUNE
PlaNet/EET
NPS/X
Property Data
XML
7 2 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Importing ENTERPRISE Data
To import ENTERPRISE data:
1. Ensure you are using a blank project, otherwise importing this file will
overwrite all your data.
2. From the File menu, point to Import and click Enterprise.
3. Browse for the Enterprise file (*.aii) and click Import.
Note : You will become the owner of all the imported objects, for example
sites, cells and so on.
Importing GSM Data
You can make GSM carriers, neighbours and exceptions data files, for example, in
Microsoft Excel, then save the files as *.txt files and import them:
1. From the File menu, point to Import, Project Data and click GSM Import.
2. Select the option(s) you require.
3. For each selected option, browse for the file (*.txt) you require then click
Import.
For information about these file formats, see the ENTERPRISE User Reference
Guide.
Importing NEPTUNE Data
To import NEPTUNE data:
1. From the File menu, point to Import, Project Data and click Neptune.
2. For each file from which you want to import, select the check box on the
appropriate tab and click the button to browse for the appropriate text file.
3. For carriers and neighbours files, you can choose to replace the existing
carriers and neighbours.
4. When you have entered all the appropriate filenames, click Import.
Note : NEPTUNE format is GSM network only.
Importing PlaNet/EET Data
To import PlaNet/EET data:
1. From the File menu, point to Import, Project Data and click PlaNet/EET.
You can import from PlaNet Versions 2.5, 2.6 2.7 and 2.8 and the version of
the PlaNet files will determined automatically.
2. On the PlaNet Import dialog box, select each appropriate tab, select the check
box and browse for the text file for that item.
3. Where enabled, choose whether you want to delete existing items and replace
them with the imported ones.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 7 3
Version 4.0
4. If carriers are required, on the Carriers tab, select the check box and browse
for the text file. For the carrier types (layers), select the check box and browse
for two files (*.types and *.names). If carrier groups are to be imported, click
the groups check box and browse for the groups file (*.groups).
5. If antennas are required, you can also add the antennas to all the projects
saved under this database.
6. When all the files have been selected for the PlaNet/EET import, click Import.
Resolving Conflicts Between Current and Imported Data
When importing, conflicts between imported data and current data in the project
can be detected. When a conflict is detected, a dialog box appears in which you can
choose what to do.
Note : If you have anything shared between projects, for example antennas, and you
export and re-import as a new project in the same database you will get a message
telling you that you are re-importing duplicate information. This message appears
for each data point on an antenna, so ideally do not try and re-import items that are
shared between projects.
About the Carrier Layer Name Match Dialog Box
If the names of an imported and an existing carrier match, a dialog box is displayed
in which you can choose to do one of the following:
Option Description
Rename The carrier can be imported under a new name.
Merge The carriers in the imported layer are merged with the existing ones.
Merge All This and any other carrier for which there is a name match will be merged.
Stop The Import will be stopped at this point. Carrier layers already imported will be
unaffected, but no further carriers will be imported.
About the Database Parent Mismatch Dialog Box
If a site in the import file is parented onto a site that does not exist, a dialog box is
displayed and you can choose to:
Update the current database to match. Thus, the site with the name of the
parent site will be created. You can then choose whether to re-parent the child
site onto the newly created site.
Update the current database to match and create both the new parent site as
well as any other sites which are parents in the import file, but not present in
the project
Not to update the current database to match and not to create the new parent
site
Not to update the current database to match and not to create any new
parents
7 4 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Stop the import, and not to import any further sites or cells
Where There is a Clash of Name or Site
When importing, if there is a clash, a dialog box informs you that one of these is the
problem:
An MSC upon which a site in the import file is to be parented is of the wrong
network type
A layer being imported has the same name as an existing one of the opposite
network type
A site in the import file is parented by a site which matches an existing site in
the project, but of a different type
You can choose to:
Rename either the existing item or the item from the import file. The conflict
is then resolved and you can continue importing.
Stop importing
Importing NPS/X Data
ENTERPRISE supports NPS/X database file version 3.4. To import NPS/X data:
1. From the File menu, point to Import, Project Data and click NPS/X.
2. Click the Browse button and locate the *.dat file that you want to import.
3. Select the file and click Open.
4. If you also want to import the models in this file, select the Import Models
check box.
5. Click Import to import the NPS/X database.
Importing Property Data
When you import property data from a file that you have previously exported,
follow these steps:
1. Open the txt file and have a look to see whether the property data was
exported with XY co-ordinates, LON LAT co-ordinates or both.
2. If the file contains both sets of co-ordinates, choose one, and delete the two
columns that make up the other.
For example, cut and paste the file into Microsoft Excel, keep the XY columns
and delete the LON LAT columns.
3. Save the file again.
4. From the File menu, point to Import, Project Data and click Property Data.
5. Locate the appropriate file and click Open.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 7 5
Version 4.0
Importing XML Data
To import XML Data:
1. Ensure you have permissions to import data. If you do not have permissions,
see your administrator.
2. From the File menu, point to Import and click XML.
3. Click the browse button and locate the *.xml file that you want to import
from.
4. Select the file and click Open. The file and path will appear in the File Import
pane and a list of items available for import will appear in the Project and
Config tabs.
5. Select the items you want to import from the lists. If you want to import all
items on each tab select the Select All checkbox.
Note : The Select All checkbox only affects the tab you are viewing.
Important : If you de-select the Select All checkbox, all selected items on the
tab you are viewing will also de-selected.
6. In the Import Conflicts pane, you can select the radio buttons for how the
importer handles data which differs from that existing in the project. If you
select the Prompt Individually radio button, then every time a conflict occurs
during the import, you will be prompted with a message box giving you one
of these options:
Option Description
Stop Ends the import
Replace Replaces the existing item with the one you are importing.
Merge Merges the existing item with the one you are importing.
Leave Ignores the conflict and continues with importing the remaining items.
If you select the Apply To All check box, this will apply the option you have
just made, Replace, Leave or Merge, to further conflicts.
The following is an example of the message box:
7. When you have finished selecting the information you want to import, click
Import.
The Enterprise message window will report any errors or conflicts that may
have happened during the import.
7 6 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Overview of Exporting Data
Exporting data is like saving a Microsoft Word 97 document as a Word 2.0
document. It means that you produce something that can be read by earlier versions
of the software or alternative software.
Just as certain formatting information is not retained between versions of Word,
exporting only includes the information needed by the earlier version of the
software and therefore, certain information, for example, cell layers, is not exported.
Warning : Therefore, you cannot recreate your original database from exported
information. The only way to back up your database is to do so at database level.
For information on this, see your Oracle database administration documentation
and also page 7-9 of this manual.
You can export data to these formats:
Coverage (MapInfo)
Coverage (Coversoft/GSM Association)
Coverage (Intergraph)
ENTERPRISE
NEPTUNE
PlaNet/EET
Property Data
XML
Exporting Coverage (MapInfo) Data
You can export coverage to MapInfo in three ways:
To bitmaps
To TIFFs
To MIFs
Exporting to MapInfo Bitmaps
To transfer the coverage array currently in memory to MapInfo by creating a bitmap
file, and optionally a header:
1. From the File menu, point to Export, Arrays, Coverage and click MapInfo-
Image.
2. If you choose to save the file with a header (MapInfo Table file), this can then
be opened in MapInfo and be the basis of a new table.
3. If you do select this check box, you can also edit the MapInfo Co-ordinate
System string, which is stored in the MapInfo header file.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 7 7
Version 4.0
4. Preview the file. You must do this before you can save.
The bitmap contains the entire coverage array, independent of any open map
views.
5. Click Save and name the bitmap file.
If you selected the Generate MapInfo Header check box, a MapInfo header
file (*.tab) is also created.
Exporting to MapInfo TIFFs
To transfer the coverage array currently in memory to a MapInfo header file
(extension .tab) and a Tagged Image File Format (*.tif) file containing the image:
1. From the File menu, point to Export, Arrays, Coverage and click MapInfo -
Tiff.
2. Type or browse for the filename.
3. You can change the Co-ordinates if required.
The coverage area is determined from the extent of the array, the coverage
resolution is that which was determined in the coverage prediction upon
which the array was based.
4. You can set the scale of the tiff in pixels per unit.
5. Click OK to export.
Exporting to MapInfo MIFs
To create a MapInfo Interface Format (*.mif) file and MapInfo Data File (*.mid),
which can be added to an existing table by using Import in MapInfo:
1. From the File menu, point to Export, Arrays, Coverage and click MapInfo -
Mif.
2. Type or browse for the filename, select the required options and click OK.
All selected cell fields in this list are exported to the mif file and can be
browsed in the browse table when the mif file is loaded into MapInfo.
7 8 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
About the Export Coverage MapInfo MIF Dialog Box
The Export Coverage MapInfo MIF dialog box enables you to export service area
and coverage information in a form readable by MapInfo.
This picture shows an example of the dialog box:
Export Coverage Map Info Dialog Box
The following table describes the options on this dialog box
Select To
Fill Polygons Export the colours that are used in the Map View window.
Fill cells with colour for the Export Service Area.
Fill areas that are the same coverage category with colour for the
Export Coverage.
Ignore Areas less than x
Pixels in size
Ignore areas less than a particular value in pixels.
Include No Signal Areas Include all areas of no signal as a region in the MapInfo table. If this
is not selected, areas of no signal will be blank.
No Signal as Transparent Import the areas of no signal but mark them as transparent so the
background will be visible through it.
Export Service Area Export a set of polygons using latitude longitude co-ordinates for
each cell in *.mif format. Also exports list of corresponding cells and
locations in *.mid file.
Export Coverage Export a set of polygons using latitude longitude co-ordinates for
each of the defined coverage categories in *.mif format. Also
exports a *.mid data file listing the coverage categories
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 7 9
Version 4.0
Exporting ENTERPRISE Data
Exporting ENTERPRISE data is in no way equivalent to creating a back up of your
database. You should only export ENTERPRISE data when you want to import into:
Another project in the same database
A new project in a different database created in the same build
This table shows the important differences between database backups and exporting
ENTERPRISE data:
Database Back Up ENTERPRISE Export
Guaranteed to work in all later builds of
ENTERPRISE by upgrading
Only guaranteed to work in the same build of
ENTERPRISE because later builds may change
the database structure.
Contains all projects, that is, everything that
you have entered in the tool
Also contains users and groups,
permissions, map data and projection
settings
Contains committed data for a single project, that
is, everything that you have entered in the tool
after starting the project.
Does not contain users and groups, permissions,
map data and projection settings.
To backup your database:
Use an appropriate database tool, then in
the new version of ENTERPRISE, open the
Administrator and use Upgrade Database.
To perform an ENTERPRISE export:
1. From the File menu, point to Export and click
ENTERPRISE.
2. Browse for, or type, the name of the file to contain
the project information.
3. Click Export.
An *.aii file is created, together with *.aid files
that contain all the data from that project.
What If I Didn't Back Up my Database?
If you did not back up your database, and wanted to reclaim some exported data,
you would have to:
Re-install the exact build of ENTERPRISE that you had when you created the
export of data
Create a blank database
Create any custom projections/ellipsoids
Create users and groups
Create a new project then import the exported data into it
Create a database backup using the appropriate database tool, for your
reference
Install the latest version of ENTERPRISE
Upgrade the database to the latest version by using Upgrade Database in the
Administrator
7 10 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Exporting Coverage (GSM)
To export coverage in a format according to the GSM Memorandum of
Understanding (GSM MoU):
1. From the File menu, point to Export, Arrays, Coverage and click
Coversoft/GSM Association V6.
2. Type a filename and a resolution in the appropriate boxes then click OK.
One array for each of the coverage types is created, with the extension *.mou,
and 01, 02 and so on appended to the filename.
A list of files, filelist.txt is also created.
Exporting Coverage (InterGraph)
To export coverage in InterGraph format:
1. From the File menu, point to Export, Arrays, Coverage and click InterGraph.
2. Type a filename and the required resolution in the boxes, then click OK.
This table shows the files that are created:
This filename Contains
Filename.idx Index file
Filename.bts BTS List
Filename.svr Best Server Cell
Filename.cov Signal Coverage
Exporting NEPTUNE Data
To export data in NEPTUNE format:
1. From the File menu, point to Export, Project Data and click Neptune.
2. Select a filter.
3. Select the appropriate check boxes for the files you wish to create, and name
them.
4. Click Export to create the text files.
Warning : Exporting data produces something that can be read by earlier
versions of the software or alternative software. However, it does not export
everything and so you cannot recreate your original database from an export.
For more information on this, see page 7-6.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 7 11
Version 4.0
Exporting PlaNet/EET Data
ENTERPRISE supports Versions 2.5, 2.6 2.7 and 2.8 of PlaNet, corresponding to EET
R2B and EET R2C.
To export to PlaNet format:
1. From the File menu, point to Export, Project Data and click PlaNet/EET.
2. Select the version of the export file required.
Note : Distribution notes will not be exported, and if you are using 2.6, nor
will repeaters.
3. Choose a filter to export certain sites or All for all sites.
4. Select the check box of each item required and browse to the correct location
of the relevant file, or type in the path and filename. For example:
Note : Although the files for flags, sites/cells, carriers and neighbours should
include their extension (.txt), the filename for Carrier Types/Names/Group
should not include an extension, as this is used as the stem of three files, to
which extensions are added.
5. Click Export.
Warning : Exporting data produces something that can be read by earlier
versions of the software or alternative software. However, it does not export
everything and so you cannot recreate your original database from an export.
For more information on this, see page 7-6.
7 12 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Exporting Property Data
To export property data from ENTERPRISE, follow these steps:
1. From the File menu, point to Export, Project Data, and then click Property
Data.
2. Select the property data set that you want to export, by choosing one of the
filters.
3. Select whether you want to export the property data with Easting-Northing
co-ordinates or Longitude-Latitude co-ordinates.
4. Type in the required Export filename, or click the Browse button and locate
the required file.
5. Click OK.
Exporting XML Data
To export XML data:
1. From the File menu, point to Export and click XML.
2. In the Export Folder pane, click the browse button and locate the folder
to which you want to export the data to.
3. On the Project tab, use the drop down menu in the Export Filter pane to select
the filter you want to export data from.
4. Select the items you want to export from the lists on the Project and Config
tab. If you want to export all items on each tab select the Select All checkbox.
Note : The Select All checkbox only affects the tab you are viewing.
Important : If you de-select the Select All checkbox, all selected items on the
tab you are viewing will also de-selected.
Tip : You can multi select items holding the Shift key down while selecting
the items.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide 7 13
Version 4.0
5. When you have selected all the items you wish to export, click Export.
The following picture is an example of the XML Export dialog box:
The following picture shows an example XML file:
7 14 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Importing and Exporting Equipment
You can import and export equipment such as antennas, BTS equipment, masts,
cabins, feeders and cell equipment, as well as contact and supplier details.
Exporting Equipment
To export equipment:
1. From the File menu, point to Export, Equipment and click All Equipment.
2. Enter the name of a file or browse to an existing file that you wish to replace.
3. Move the equipment you require from the Available to the Selected pane by
clicking Add or Add All.
4. Click Export.
Importing Equipment
To import equipment:
1. From the File menu, point to Import, Equipment and click All Equipment.
2. Browse to the required text file.
3. Select the Add to all projects check box if you want the equipment added to
all projects in the current database.
4. Click Import.
Error checking is performed on import, for example bounds-checking and if a
value falls outside a specified range, then an error is displayed in the Message
Log window, and that line inside the entry file is skipped.
If there are any duplicate names, you are asked whether you want to rename
them or skip that entry.
5. To rename, type in a new name then click Rename or press Return.
Otherwise, click Skip.
Tip : You can also press the ESC key to skip entries quickly and not import
the duplicate.

ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 1
Version 4.0
A File Formats
Overview of File Formats
This chapter describes the following topics:
Map Data format
ENTERPRISE Data formats
NEPTUNE Data formats
Miscellaneous Vendor formats
Colour palette file format
Important : Except where otherwise mentioned, spaces in text files are treated as
delimiters. Therefore, if you have spaces within names of models, antennas, carrier
layers and so on, you need to remove them. It is recommended that you replace
them with underscores or run the words together, for example, Flat Terrain becomes
FlatTerrain. This may mean temporarily changing your existing ENTERPRISE
names so that items will match those from the import file. After a successful import,
you can change the names back again.
Warning : If an export is made from a database that uses spaces, it will not be
possible to import without editing the file manually.
Map Data Format
ENTERPRISE uses well-defined and easily obtainable map data formats that can be
ordered from all major digital mapping data suppliers. Conceptually, a pixel
represents the average value over the complete pixel. Each pixel is referred to using
the lower left co-ordinate.
Slashes in index file paths can be either / or \ to allow easy sharing of data with PC
and UNIX based file servers. Although subdirectories are supported with the paths,
the up-one-directory symbol is not e.g.010\..\.
A 2 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Height Data Format
The height data digital terrain model (DTM) is stored in a binary format where
each element of the data represents the height above sea level in metres for a square
area of, for example, 50m x 50m.
Index File
An ASCII text file called index.txt contains positional information about each binary
height file.
The file contains one row describing each height file. Relative path names can be
incorporated within the filename to allow a structured approach to map data
directory organisation.
Each row contains the following variables separated by a space:
Field Description
Filename Filename of DTM Height file
Eastmin Minimum Easting value (metres)
Eastmax Maximum Easting value (metres)
Northmin Minimum Northing value (metres)
Northmax Maximum Northing value (metres)
Square Size Size of each element of the height data (metres)
For example:
.\050\f1.050.bin 100000 125000 50000 75000 50
.\050\f2.050.bin 125000 150000 50000 75000 50
.\250\f1.250.bin 100000 125000 50000 75000 250
.\250\f2.250.bin 125000 150000 50000 75000 250
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
Note : The co-ordinates must be integer multiples of the pixel size otherwise the
positional geo-reference accuracy will be lost.
Binary Height Format
Each element is two bytes in size and the most significant byte is stored first. The
elements are stored in one continuous array such that the size of the array in the
following example would be 500 (wide) x 500 (high) x 2 (bytes per element) =
500,000 bytes.
If there are pixels within the file that are outside the limits of the map, the value
-9999 is stored at that location.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 3
Version 4.0
Clutter Data
The clutter data is stored in a binary format with each element of the data containing
a code corresponding to a category of land usage for a square area of, for example,
50m x 50m.
Index File
An ASCII text file called index.txt contains positional information about each binary
clutter file.
The file contains one row describing each clutter file. Relative path names can be
incorporated within the filename to allow a structured approach to map data
directory organisation.
Each row contains the following variables separated by a space:
Field Description
Filename Filename of Clutter file
The combination of index filename and path should not exceed 255
characters otherwise ENTERPRISE will truncate it and in the event of a
duplication in the truncated names, ENTERPRISE will not add the
duplicate.
Eastmin Minimum Easting value (metres)
Eastmax Maximum Easting value (metres)
Northmin Minimum Northing value (metres)
Northmax Maximum Northing value (metres)
Square Size Size of each element of the clutter data (metres)
For example:
.\050\f1.050.bin 100000 125000 50000 75000 50
.\050\f2.050.bin 125000 150000 50000 75000 50
.\250\f1.250.bin 100000 125000 50000 75000 250
.\250\f2.250.bin 125000 150000 50000 75000 250
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
Note : The co-ordinates must be integer multiples of the pixel size otherwise the
positional geo-reference accuracy will be lost.
Menu File
In addition an ASCII text file called menu.txt contains a table relating the clutter
codes stored in the binary clutter file with a textual description of the clutter
category. Each line contains one code followed by one description space separated.
This file must be in the same directory as the index file.
The textual description cannot be more than 32 characters long. If the descriptions
are longer than this, they will be truncated. In the event of a duplication in the
truncated descriptions, ENTERPRISE will warn you and will not add the duplicate.
A 4 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
For example:
22 Woodland
32 Suburban
36 Urban
44 Wetlands
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
Binary Clutter Format
Each element is two bytes in size and the most significant byte is stored first. The
elements are stored in one continuous array such that the size of the array in the
following example would be 500 (wide) x 500 (high) x 2 (bytes per element) =
500,000 bytes.
Backdrops
Map backdrops and aerial photographs can be supplied as Windows bitmaps
(*.bmp), JPEG, TIFF, GIF, PCX amd TARGA files.
If you use bitmaps, these can be any number of colours (2 bit through to 24 bit) but
must not use compression (Run Length Encoding). If uncompressed images are
giving you performance problems, it is recommended that you use the NTFS file
system with file compression.
You can define subcategories of backdrop and an index file and data file(s) need to
exist in each of the relevant subfolders.
Note : You can store backdrops multiple resolutions of data in separate folders:
or store them according to type:
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 5
Version 4.0
Index File
An ASCII text file called index.txt in the Backdrops folder contains a list of all
subfolders. For example an index.txt file might contain:
1m
20m
5m
Also, in each subfolder of Backdrops that you create, a further ASCII text file called
index.txt should exist containing geo-reference information about each image file.
This file can refer to multiple files with one row giving information about one image
file. The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
Field Description
Filename Filename of data file
The combination of index filename and path should not exceed 255
characters otherwise ENTERPRISE will truncate it and in the event of a
duplication in the truncated names, ENTERPRISE will not add the
duplicate.
Eastmin Minimum Easting value (metres)
Eastmax Maximum Easting value (metres)
Northmin Minimum Northing value (metres)
Northmax Maximum Northing value (metres)
For example:
llanelli.bmp 240000 270000 183836 208220
bridgend.bmp 275137 310000 160000 184658
neath.bmp 270000 290000 185342 200000
p_talbot.bmp 272000 278000 189000 194000
Tip : Ensure that the images in this file are ordered from the least to the most
detailed (higher resolution), with the most detailed files at the end of the index.txt
file. This means when you have backdrops displayed in the Map View window,
ASSET will build up the display sequentially, automatically switching between
maps and choosing the best file for the zoom level.
Note : Unlike other index files, backdrops do not have a m/pixel value as this is
automatically calculated from the co-ordinates specified and the number of
pixels/row in the image. Any distortion in the co-ordinates compared to the image
dimensions will result in a corresponding distortion of the viewed image.
Binary Image Format
This format is fully described the Microsoft Windows Programmers Reference
Guide. The images can have colours ranging from 1bit to 24bit.
A 6 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Using Map Backdrops Effectively
This section gives some tips for using map backdrops effectively.
If You Have High Resolution Maps Covering A Large Area
If you have high resolution maps covering a large area, and your image files are too
small, there will be hundreds of files and it will take more time to browse and load
the files. Files that are too large will lead to a performance hit when viewing just a
small area of the large file.
Therefore, it is recommended that you "tile" the area into files of size 1Mb to 4Mb.
Ideally these files should not overlap. Overlapping files are supported, however if
you replace files, or reorder the index file, the overlapping sequence could change
giving different visual results.
When the Map Backdrop Does Not Appear in the Map View Window
ENTERPRISE determines whether the map backdrop is worth displaying by
checking that the image is not reduced too much using an algorithm that says "if the
number of width pixels on the display is less than a third of the pixels of the image
then do not display the map backdrop".
Otherwise a frame indicating the map backdrops area is displayed on the map .
Other Factors in Effectively Using Map Backdrops
Other things that have an impact on the proper use of map backdrops include:
The number of pixels estimate calculates this value from the file size and
assuming the image is square. Consequently, if your images are very long
and thin or short and wide, the visibility algorithm will give differing results
for the same metres/pixel images. Therefore you should always have square
images.
Use the file naming conventions suggested in the Installation and
Administration Guide and especially:
Use relative path names within the image filename to allow a structured
approach to map data directory organisation.
Arrange the images into directories corresponding to the metres / pixel
value to make life easier when working with multiple resolutions and
improve folder browsing speed when many images are present in a folder.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 7
Version 4.0
Vector Data
Line/Vector data contains features such as roads, railways, coastlines, etc. and are
stored in either ASCII text files or in a proprietary binary format. Separate mapping
features must be in separate data files, however there can be more than one file for a
single feature.
Vector Data Index File
An ASCII text file called index.txt contains positional information about vector file.
Relative path names can be incorporated within the filename to allow a structured
approach to map data directory organisation.
Each row contains the following variables separated by a space:
Field Description
Filename Filename of vector data file
The combination of index filename and path should not exceed 255
characters otherwise ENTERPRISE will truncate it and in the event of a
duplication in the truncated names, ENTERPRISE will not add the
duplicate.
Eastmin Minimum Easting value (metres)
Eastmax Maximum Easting value (metres)
Northmin Minimum Northing value (metres)
Northmax Maximum Northing value (metres)
Feature Name Name of the feature stored in the vector data file (Motorway, Coast, etc.)
This cannot be more than 32 characters long. Descriptions longer than
this will be truncated. In the event of a duplication in the truncated
descriptions, ENTERPRISE will not add the duplicate.
For example:
.\Roads\3000.txt 10000 30000 10000 20000 Motorway
.\Roads\3001.txt 10000 30000 10000 20000 A Road
.\Roads\3002.txt 10000 30000 10000 20000 B Road
.\Roads\3004.bin 10000 30000 10000 20000 Minor Road
.\Bounds\3008.bin 10000 30000 10000 20000 Coast
.\Bounds\3008.bin 10000 30000 10000 20000 Councils
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
A 8 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
ASCII Vector Format
The format is commonly known as Genamap 19. The format of the header record
is as follows:
Field Position Description
1 1-5 Record Identifier (not used)
2 6-15 Blanks
3 16-47 32 Character description (not used)
4 48-50 Blanks
5 51-55 Record Count
The header file is then followed by a space separated x y pair in text format. For
example:
0 VECTOR 6
260220 186870
260530 186920
260830 187110
261080 187110
261520 187010
261820 186860
0 VECTOR 2
277610 189187
278775 187546
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
Binary Vector Format
Converting text vectors to binary vectors improves application performance and
reduces disk usage requirements. ENTERPRISE does this automatically when you
have:
Added a new project and specified a vector directory that contains an
index.txt file. ENTERPRISE will convert all the files (binary or text) that are
referenced in the index file to vector binary (*.vbf) files.
Imported text or binary (*.bin) files in the Vector Editor. For information on
doing this, see Chapter 5. ENTERPRISE converts the files on import to the vbf
format.
Note : You cannot write your own vbf files because they contain version numbers
and unique database keys.
You can create binary format files with the file extension .bin from text format files
using the vec2bin.exe program which can be found in the ENTERPRISE program
directory.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 9
Version 4.0
Population Vector Data
The file format for population vector data is identical to that for building vector
data, except with a population attribute rather than a height attribute. That is,
population vector data is stored in ASCII format and requires three types of input
file:
An index file
A vector data file
An attributes file
Each line in the index file describes: a vector data file name, an attribute file name,
Easting Northing co-ordinates representing a bounding box around that feature and
the feature name itself. Since each segment within the population vector data file
represents population, the vector index file usually only refers to one feature, for
example census or population.
The data file contains segments of discrete vector points - each segment being a
different area of population. The attributes file contains values for each segment in
the data file.
Population Index File
An ASCII text file called index.txt contains positional information about vector file.
Relative path names can be incorporated within the filename to allow a structured
approach to map data directory organisation.
Each row contains the following variables separated by a space:
Field Description
Filename Filename of vector data file
The combination of index filename and path should not exceed 255
characters otherwise ENTERPRISE will truncate it and in the event of a
duplication in the truncated names, ENTERPRISE will not add the
duplicate.
Attribute filename Filename of population attributes file
Eastmin Minimum Easting value (metres)
Eastmax Maximum Easting value (metres)
Northmin Minimum Northing value (metres)
Northmax Maximum Northing value (metres)
Feature Name Name of the feature stored in the vector data file
For example:
census_vector.txt census_attr.att 564115 566168 5447551 5449625 census
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
A 10 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
ASCII Vector Format for Population Vectors
The format of the header for this file is as follows:
Field Position Description
1 1-5 Record Identifier
2 6-15 Blanks
3 16-47 32 Character description (not used, same as feature name field in
index file entry)
4 48-50 Blanks
5 51-55 Record Count
Then coordinates for each polygon are shown.
This shows an example population file:
1 census 14
166159.930000051 196425.179157972
165978.420000051 196266.619157971
166057.180000051 196118.10915797
165946.840000051 196062.679157972
165584.47000005 196064.999157972
165492.42000005 196284.539157972
165528.26000005 196395.269157971
165357.71000005 196491.439157971
165297.89000005 196663.539157974
165460.84000005 197007.479157973
165632.290000051 196895.189157973
165713.120000051 196808.819157973
165842.420000051 196683.519157972
166159.930000051 196425.179157972
2 census 13
174448.240000005 167277.869157938
174518.110000005 167193.169157938
174626.910000005 167075.349157938
174679.630000005 167015.789157938
174525.590000005 166949.009157938
174332.600000005 166891.259157937
174160.640000004 166833.509157936
174089.990000004 167018.109157939
174038.300000004 167246.539157937
174045.520000004 167340.129157937
174186.290000004 167288.309157938
174345.370000005 167266.139157938
174448.240000005 167277.869157938
Example Population File
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 11
Version 4.0
ASCII Attributes Format for Population Vectors
An ASCII text file, named in the index file contains information about the
population segments contained in the vector data file.
Each row contains a record, as follows:
Field Position Description
1 1-5 Record Identifier
2 6 Delimiter <space>
3 7-19 12 Character vector segment description (not used)
4 20 Delimiter <space>
5 21-26 Population number (floating point, two decimal places)
For example:
1 census 232
2 census 753
3 census 93
4 census 612
5 census 227
6 census 2228
Example Attribute File
Building Vector Data
Building vector data is a specialised version of normal vector data, describing the
shapes and heights of buildings in great detail. The application of such data will
typically be to provide input for ray-tracing type propagation models, used for the
generation microcell coverage within the planning tool.
Building vector data is stored in ASCII format and requires three types of input file -
a vector data file, an attributes file and an index file. The index file is similar to a
normal vector index file. Each line describes: a vector data file name, an attribute file
name, Easting Northing co-ordinates representing a bounding box around that
feature and the feature name itself. Since each segment within the building vector
data file represents a building wall, the building vector index file usually only refers
to one feature.
The data file contains segments of discrete vector points - each segment being a
different building wall perimeter. The attributes file contains floating-point height
value for each segment in the data file.
A 12 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Building Vector Index File
An ASCII text file called index.txt contains positional information about vector files.
Relative path names can be incorporated within the filename to allow a structured
approach to map data directory organisation.
Each row contains the following variables separated by a space:
Field Description
Filename Filename of vector data file
The combination of index filename and path should not exceed 255
characters otherwise ENTERPRISE will truncate it and in the event of a
duplication in the truncated names, ENTERPRISE will not add the
duplicate.
Attribute filename Filename of building attributes (heights) file
Eastmin Minimum Easting value (metres)
Eastmax Maximum Easting value (metres)
Northmin Minimum Northing value (metres)
Northmax Maximum Northing value (metres)
Feature Name Name of the feature stored in the vector data file
For example:
.\London\build_vec.txt .\London\build_atr.txt 1627764 1630022 6579401 6582574 London
buildings
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
ASCII Vector Format for Building Vectors
The format of the header record is as follows:
Field Position Description
1 1-5 Record Identifier (used to identify building segment in attributes file)
2 6-15 Blanks
3 16-47 32 Character description (not used, same as feature name field in
index file entry)
4 48-50 Blanks
5 51-55 Record Count
For example:
0 VECTOR 5
1629899 6582457
1629886 6582464
1629951 6582573
1629963 6582566
1629899 6582457
0 VECTOR 19
1628823 6582523
1628821 6582527
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 13
Version 4.0
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
ASCII Attributes Format for Building Vectors
An ASCII text file, named in the index file contains height information about the
building segments contained in the vector data file.
Each row contains a record, as follows:
Field Position Description
1 1-5 Record Identifier (used to identify building segment in vector data file)
2 6 Delimiter <space>
3 7-19 12 Character vector segment description (not used)
4 20 Delimiter <space>
5 21-26 Vector segment height (floating point, two decimal places)
For example:
1 Terminal_1 25.40
2 Terminal_2 25.40
3 Terminal_3 24.10
4 ATC_Tower 35.90
5 Shopping_Ctr 33.25
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
Building Raster Data
The DEM format is exactly the same as the DTM except that the height values stored
represent building height above ground level, that is, flat earth. Typically the pixel
sizes would be in the range of 1m to 10m.
Text Data
Text data consists of features such as town names, city names, etc. The text data is
stored in either ASCII files or in a proprietary binary format. Separate mapping
features must be in separate data files, however there can be more than one file for a
single feature.
Index File
An ASCII text file called index.txt contains positional information about text file.
Relative path names can be incorporated within the filename to allow a structured
approach to map data directory organisation.
A 14 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Each row contains the following variables separated by a space:
Field Description
Filename Filename of text data file
The combination of index filename and path should not exceed
255 characters otherwise ENTERPRISE will truncate it and in the
event of a duplication in the truncated names, ENTERPRISE will
not add the duplicate.
Eastmin Minimum Easting value (metres)
Eastmax Maximum Easting value (metres)
Northmin Minimum Northing value (metres)
Northmax Maximum Northing value (metres)
Feature Name Textual Description of the text data file.
For example:
.\north\cities.bin 120000 220000 140000 200000 City names
.\south\cities.txt 120000 220000 080000 140000 City names
.\all\roads.txt 0 10000000 0 10000000 Road names
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
ASCII Text Format
Each row contains the following variables separated by a space:
Field Description
Easting Easting position of the text (metres)
Northing Northing position of the text (metres)
Text Text to be displayed
For example:
272983 191820 PORT TALBOT
267473 193725 SWANSEA
276453 198419 NEATH
281282 192636 MAESTEG
289402 181510 BRIDGEND
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
Binary Text Format
Binary format files must have the file extension .bin and can only be created from
the text format files using the text2bin.exe program which can be found in the
ENTERPRISE program directory. Converting to binary text improves application
performance and reduces disk usage requirements.
The format of the binary files is a continuous set of records, one for each entry. Each
record contains x and y co-ordinates as 32-bit signed integers followed by a 24
character array containing the text to be displayed. The character string should be
NULL terminated.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 15
Version 4.0
ENTERPRISE Data Formats
Many file formats are supported within the ENTERPRISE suite, some of them are
unique to ENTERPRISE whereas others are common to a variety of tools.
Important : Except where otherwise mentioned, spaces in text files are treated as
delimiters. Therefore, if you have spaces within names of models, antennas, carrier
layers and so on, you need to remove them. It is recommended that you replace
them with underscores or run the words together, for example, Flat Terrain becomes
FlatTerrain. This may mean temporarily changing your existing ENTERPRISE
names so that items will match those from the import file. After a successful import,
you can change the names back again.
Warning : If an export is made from a database that uses spaces, it will not be
possible to import without editing the file manually.
You can export particular items from your network , for example carriers,
exceptions, neighbours and you can also export a whole project to an *.aii file.
This section describes all the file formats that you can use in ENTERPRISE. For
additional ASSET file formats, see the ASSET User Reference Guide.
Exporting and Importing Whole Projects
You can export a whole project to ENTERPRISE format as an *.aii file. However, this
may be more data than you require. Also you should be aware that exporting to an
ENTERPRISE *.aii file:
Is only guaranteed to work in the same build of ENTERPRISE because later
builds may change the database structure
Contains a single project only, that is, everything that you have entered in the
tool after starting the project
Does not contain users and groups, permissions, map data and projection
settings
Creates an *.aii file that references *.aid files that are also created and contain
all the data from that project
Can only be performed if you have the Import privilege, set up in the
ENTERPRISE Administrator
A 16 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Exporting Data as XML
If you have import privileges, set up in the ENTERPRISE Administrator, you can
import and export committed ENTERPRISE data as XML files.
To export data as XML:
1. From the File menu, point to Export and select XML Export.
2. Select any relevant filter and the elements that you want to export.
3. Browse to a folder where you want the files to be saved.
This process will produce:
An export.log detailing the files that were created
An index.xml file that details all the contents of all the files in one xml file
Various other xml files depending on what you have selected, for example,
BSCs.xml
You can modify the files in an XML editor such as Microsoft XML Notepad before
importing them, providing you do not alter the format of the files. This picture
shows an example of a BSCs.xml file:
Example XML file
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 17
Version 4.0
Importing XML Data
If you have import privileges set up in the ENTERPRISE Administrator, you can
import and export committed ENTERPRISE data as XML. To import data from
XML:
1. From the File menu, point to Import and select XML Import.
2. Select the name of the import file that you want to use. For example, to
import only MSCs, select the MSCs.xml file. To have the choice of importing
everything, select the index.xml file.
The information that you can import from the selected file is displayed in the
Import Data pane.
3. Select the elements that you want to import from this file.
4. Select how you want conflicts to be handled during import. You can be
prompted on a individual basis, or can for all conflicts, replace the data in the
project with the imported data, merge the data or leave the existing data as it
is.
5. When prompted, click Import to begin importing. During import:
If you do not have permission to create or update an object type that you
are trying to import, you are given the choice of stopping importing or
ignoring.
If the user specified in the import does not exist in your database, the user
will default to a user called aircom.
If an imported element's parent does not exist in your database, a dummy
parent is created prior to its import.
If there were any problems, messages are shown in the message log.
GSM Import
Using the GSM Import from the File menu, you can import:
GSM Carriers
GSM Exceptions
GSM Neighbours
The file formats are described below.
A 18 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
GSM Import Carriers File
The GSM Carriers Import file must be tab separated (spaces will not work) and
contain these columns:
Field Data Type Description
CELL_ID CHAR Name of the cell. This column heading must be in UPPER CASE.
ARFCN INT Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
CarLay CHAR Name of carrier layer
ARFCN2 INT Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
CarLay 2 CHAR Name of carrier layer
ARFCN3 INT Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
CarLay 3 CHAR Name of carrier layer
ARFCN4 INT Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
CarLay 4 CHAR Name of carrier layer
ARFCN5 INT Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
CarLay 5 CHAR Name of carrier layer
ARFCN6 INT Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
CarLay 6 CHAR Name of carrier layer
Cell Layer
Name
CHAR Name of cell layer
BCC INT Base Station Colour Code
TRX Req INT Number of transceivers required for the carrier layer.
-1 is used to automatically set the transceivers required to the actual
number of carriers allocated in the file.
HSN INT Hopping sequence number
Hopping
Type
CHAR Choice of these hopping types:
None
Baseband
Synthesized
Note : These are case sensitive.
NCC INT Network Colour Code, must be in the range 0 - 7
For each subsequent row, after the header row, include the appropriate data.
If you only want to import less than 6 carriers, leave the remaining column pairs
empty but retain the tabs. For example, if importing 4 carriers, leave ARFCN5 and
CarLay5 and ARFCN6 and CarLay6 empty.
If you need to import more than 6 carriers, start a new row with the same Cell ID
and it will add them accumulatively.
Carriers are imported to the carrier layers defined on each row. You can only specify
one cell layer per row, so if you want to import to multiple cell layers include
multiple rows for the same cell identifier.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 19
Version 4.0
Warning : If a cell is referred to in the GSM carriers file, when you import, any
existing carrier layer and carrier allocations for that cell are replaced with the
information given in the file. Therefore, you cannot use this file to merge.
An example of a GSM Carriers File is shown below:
Example GSM Carrier File
GSM Import Exceptions File
The GSM Exceptions file is tab separated and contains:
Field Data Type
EXC_CELL_FROM CHAR
EXC_CELL_TO CHAR
CAR_SEP INT
An example of a GSM Exceptions File is:
EXC_CELL_FROM EXC_CELL_TO CAR_SEP
Site02A Site04A 3
Site02A Site04B 3
Site02A Site04C 3
Site02B Site04B 3
Site03A Site05A 3
Site03A Site05B 7
Site03A Site05C 7
Example GSM Exceptions File
GSM Neighbours Import File
The GSM Neighbours file is tab separated and contains:
Field Data Type
NBR_CELL_FROM CHAR
NBR_CELL_TO CHAR
HO_MARGIN INT
A 20 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
An example GSM Neighbours File is:
NBR_CELL_FROM NBR_CELL_TO HO_MARGIN
Site02A Site04A 3
Site02A Site04B 3
Site02A Site04C 3
Site02B Site04B 3
Site03A Site05A 3
Site03A Site05B 7
Site03A Site05C 7
Site03A Site06A 7
Example GSM Neighbours File
Properties Import
You can import Properties using File Import. The file format for imported properties
is the same as the Properties Export file, apart from one thing. The Import file
contains only one set of co-ordinates and your properties export file contains both
sets of co-ordinates.
When you import, you are asked which set of co-ordinates you wish to retain, and
the other set is deleted from the file.
Warning : Therefore back up your file if you want to keep a copy containing both
sets of co-ordinates.
Therefore, for export files containing both sets of co-ordinates, follow these steps to
remove one of the sets of co-ordinates from the export file before importing:
1. Open the exported file in an appropriate application, for example, Microsoft
Excel, or Notepad.
2. Remove columns that you do not require, for example, if you want to use X
and Y co-ordinates, remove the LON and LAT columns.
3. Import the file.
If the file contains a property that already exists in your project, the property
in the imported file is ignored.
Properties Export
You can export properties using File Export. The file format for exported properties
is as follows.
One header row lists the fields that are exported for each property, that is:
IDENTITY
ADDR1
ADDR2
TOWN
PROVINCE
POSTCODE
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 21
Version 4.0
X (this will not be here if you chose to export LON LAT co-ordinates only)
Y (this will not be here if you chose to export LON LAT co-ordinates only)
LON (this will not be here if you chose to export XY co-ordinates only)
LAT (this will not be here if you chose to export XY co-ordinates only)
GNDHT
CONTACTFIRST
CONTACTLAST
Following the header row, there is one line per property containing these fields
separated by tabs.
Example Exported Properties File
An example of an exported properties file is shown here:
ID ADDR1 ADDR2 TOWN PROVINCE POSTCODE X Y GNDHT CONTACTFIRST CONTACTLAST
PX058 Addr1 Addr21 Town1 Province1 Postcode1 473601 424614 3.0 John Smith
PX059 Addr2 Addr22 Town2 Province2 Postcode2 468898 413706 2.0 Heinrich Veenhoffer
PX077 Addr3 Addr23 Town3 Province3 Postcode3 497951 372185 62.0
PX078 Addr4 Addr24 Town4 Province4 Postcode4 497326 369397 11.0 Emma Richards
PX079 Addr5 Addr25 Town5 Province5 Postcode5 494052 366874 10.0 Jonathan Harrison
PX080 Addr6 Addr26 Town6 Province6 Postcode6 480537 354776 13.0
PX082 Addr7 Addr27 Town7 Province7 Postcode7 480934 352974 17.0
PX084 Addr8 Addr28 Town8 Province8 Postcode8 532911 344373 1.0
PX085 Addr9 Addr29 Town9 Province9 Postcode9 506964 346052 18.0 Catherine Zumbach
Coverage and Interference Arrays
ENTERPRISE supports the facility to read and write coverage and interference
arrays. This offers significant timesaving benefits, particularly when working with
large arrays.
All array formats are stored on disk in a binary format. Each file format has the same
header section, followed by a sequential list of array elements.
There is a different array file element format for each type of array supported by this
feature. The tables below document both the common file header format and the
specific array element formats.
An array data file has the following structure on disk:
Common header section
1
st
array element (Eastmin, Northmin)
2
nd
array element (Eastmin + 1, Northmin)
...
(n-1) array element (Eastmax - 1, Northmax)
(n) array element (Eastmax, Northmax)
A 22 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
The size of each array element depends upon the array type defined in the header
section (see below). The number of elements can be determined from the geographic
region defined in the header section.
The total number of elements is calculated as follows:
Width (rows) = (Eastmax - Eastmin) / resolution
Height (columns) = (Northmax - Northmin) / resolution
Number of elements = Width x Height
Index File for Arrays
If you create an index file containing information about your arrays, you can then
simultaneously load all of your arrays for a particular area.
The Index file, which is an ASCII text file, contains an entry for each array consisting
of the filename followed by four integer values followed by the resolution
information. A new line separates each entry.
Each row contains the following variables separated by a space:
Field Description
Filename Filename of the array
Eastmin Minimum Easting value (metres)
Eastmax Maximum Easting value (metres)
Northmin Minimum Northing value (metres)
Northmax Maximum Northing value (metres)
Resolution information Resolution of array
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 23
Version 4.0
Header Section
The format of the header section is as follows:
Field Name Data Type Length
(bytes)
Description
Array type CHAR 10 String indicating the type of array contained in the
file.
Currently implemented array types:
BESTSERVER - Best server array
NTHBESTSERV nth best server array
WORSTINTRF - Worst interferer array
WORSTCONNR - Worst connection
(interference) array
AVERAGECON - Average connection
(interference) array
File format version CHAR 3 Currently implemented versions: 01A
Max No of Servers CHAR 10 Maximum number of servers
Note : This applies only to Nth Best Server array
types
Eastmin INT 4 East min. co-ordinate of array (metres)
Eastmax INT 4 East max. co-ordinate of array (metres)
Northmin INT 4 North min. co-ordinate of array (metres)
Northmax INT 4 North max. co-ordinate of array (metres)
Resolution INT 4 Resolution (square size) of array (metres)
Best Server Array Data Section
This table shows the format of best server array data:
Field Name Data Type Length
(bytes)
Description
CELLKEY INT 4 Unique database identifier for serving cell ID
LAYERKEY INT 4 Unique database identifier for cell layer which
is serving at this array element
SIGNAL LEVEL SHORT 2 Signal level of serving cell (dBm)
A 24 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Nth Best Server Array Data Section
This table shows the format of the nth best server array data:
Field Name Data Type Length
(bytes)
Description
CELLKEY INT 4 Unique database identifier for serving cell ID
LAYERKEY INT 4 Unique database identifier for cell layer which
is serving at this array element
SIGNAL LEVEL SHORT 2 Signal level of serving cell (dBm)

These fields are then repeated up to 6 times.


Worst Interferer Array Data Section
This table shows the format of worst interferer array data:
Field Name Data Type Length
(bytes)
Description
CELLKEY INT 4 Unique database identifier for cell id which is
contributing the most interference at this array
element
LAYERKEY INT 4 Unique database identifier for cell layer which is
contributing the most interference at this array
element
CI LEVEL SHORT 2 C/I interference level (dBm)
CARRIER SHORT 2 Carrier which suffers the worst interference at this
array element
Worst Connection Array Data Section
This table shows the format of worst connection array data:
Field Name Data Type Length
(bytes)
Description
CI LEVEL SHORT 2 Total C/I level (dBm) from all interferers on the
connection at this array element
CONNECTION SHORT 2 Connection (carrier or hopping group number)
Average Connection Array Data Section
This table shows the format of average connection array data:
Field Name Data Type Length
(bytes)
Description
CI LEVEL SHORT 2 Average (mean) C/I level (dBm) from each
connection at this array element
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 25
Version 4.0
Total Received Power
This table shows the format of Total Received Power:
Field Name Data Type Length
(bytes)
Discription
LEVEL SHORT 2 Total Received Power at this array element.
NOT USED SHORT 2 Not currently used.
Interference Tables
Any ASSET interference table created in memory by the user can be saved to disk
for subsequent retrieval. The Interference table file format contains cell layer and
sub-cell information.
Header Section
The format of the header section is:
Line 1 2 3 4 5
1 "ASSET Interference
Table"
<TAB> TIME
[HH:MM:SS]
<SP
>
DATE
[DD/MM/YYYY]
2 Comments can be a blank line
Data Section
This section contains rows describing two different types of objects. Sub-cell entries
describe the sub-cell that is being interfered with and contains the following
variables tab separated:
Field Name Type Description
SUBCELL CHAR SUBCELL indicates that the cell ID which follows is the
serving cell
Cell key INTEGER Unique identifier of the cell, used in the database
Layer key INTEGER Unique identifier of the layer of the sub-cell
The Cell key and layer key together uniquely identify the
sub-cell
Coverage area (km) FLOAT The total coverage area of the sub-cell
Total traffic (mE) FLOAT The total amount of traffic carried by the sub-cell
Num. Interferers INTEGER The number of interfering sub-cells to follow
Sub-Cell ID CHAR(32) The name of the cell layer
Sub-cell layer ID CHAR(32) The ID of the cell layer which the sub-cell is assigned.
A 26 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Following each sub-cell entries are INT entries, describing the interferers to the sub-
cell, containing the following variables, tab separated:
Field Name Type Description
INT CHAR INT indicates that the sub-cell ID which follows is an
interferer to the last SUBCELL
Cell key INTEGER Unique identifier of the interfering cell, used in the
database
Layer key INTEGER Unique identifier of the layer of the sub-cell.
The Cell key and layer key together uniquely identify
the interfering sub-cell.
Co-channel affected
area
FLOAT Area (km) of serving sub-cell potentially affected by
co-channel interference from this interfering sub-cell
Co-channel affected
traffic
FLOAT Traffic (mE) of serving sub-cell potentially affected by
co-channel interference from this interfering sub-cell
Adjacent channel area FLOAT Area (km) of serving sub-cell potentially affected by
adjacent channel interference from this interfering sub-
cell
Adjacent channel
affected traffic
FLOAT Traffic (mE) of serving sub-cell potentially affected by
adjacent channel interference from this interfering sub-
cell.
Sub-Cell ID CHAR(32) The Name of the interfering cell layer
Sub-cell layer ID CHAR(32) The ID of the cell layer which the sub-cell is assigned.
Example Interference Table
An example interference table file is shown below:
ASSET Interference Table 16:52:50 5\12\1999
SUBCELL 417621375 1 0.035 45.71 148 0 0017C Default
INT 417620978 1 0.00831462 10.8589 0.0004258260.556129 0013A Default
INT 417621010 1 6.69065e-050.0873798 0 0 0013C Default
INT 417621301 1 2.40356e-070.0003139050 0 0016A Default
INT 417621333 1 7.61418e-050.0994412 0 0 0017A Default
SUBCELL 417624775 1 0.0025 3.265 5 0 0339A Default
INT 417624796 1 0.00219105 2.86151 0.0008745951.14222 0339B Default
INT 417624817 1 0.00219105 2.86151 0.0008745951.14222 0339C Default
SUBCELL 417627311 1 0.3125 408.126 117 0 0404B Default
INT 417620978 1 0.0355923 46.4836 0.00119603 1.56202 0013A Default
INT 417621010 1 0.0003209160.419117 0 0 0013C Default
INT 417621333 1 4.52116e-060.00590464 0 0 0017A Default
INT 417621354 1 1.8783e-05 0.0245306 0 0 0017B Default
INT 417621375 1 0.0573502 74.8995 0.00457844 5.97944 0017C Default
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 27
Version 4.0
Neighbours
Neighbour relationship files have an extension .ain.
The file is split into two parts; the header stores the date and time of the file; and the
data section lists the neighbour relationships.
Some of an example file is shown here:
NEIGHBOUR_FILE_VERSION 3.3
CREATED 15:27:57 15/11/1999
CELL_ID SUBCELL_ID NBR_CELL_IDNBR_SUBCELL_ID HO_MARGIN
Site0A DCS Site0A GSM 3
Site0A DCS Site0B DCS 3
Site0A DCS Site0B GSM 3
Site0A DCS Site0C DCS 3
Site0A DCS Site0C GSM 3
Site0A GSM Site0A DCS 3
Site0A GSM Site0B DCS 3
Site0A GSM Site0B GSM 3
Site0A GSM Site0C DCS 3
Site0A GSM Site0C GSM 3
Site0A GSM Site10A GSM 3
Site0A GSM Site10B GSM 3
Site0A GSM Site10C GSM 3
Site0A GSM Site1A GSM 3
Site0A GSM Site1B GSM 3
Site0A GSM Site1C GSM 3
If you want to create a neighbour file manually it will be necessary to cross reference
the neighbour cell identifier with the ENTERPRISE database to obtain the cellkey
field.
Predictions
The prediction file refers to the isotropic path loss masked with the corresponding
antenna pattern for an individual transmitting antenna on a cell.
The filenames for the prediction files are constructed from various record keys in the
ENTERPRISE database and the resolution of the prediction in metres. These keys are
the cell and antenna keys.
The index of all the predictions are stored in the database table PREDINDEX. For
more information on this, see the Database Reference Guide.
The binary prediction file is split into two sections the Header and Path Loss.
Prediction Header Section
The header part is split further into three sections Cell, Antenna and Model data.
This table shows cell data:
Type Description
Int Cell Data Version Number (2)
Int Ground Height (m)
Int Number of antennas
A 28 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
This table shows antenna data:
Type Description
Int x-co-ordinate (Easting)
Int y-co-ordinate (Northing)
Int Antenna Height (m)
Int Antenna Azimuth ()
Int Antenna Tilt ()
Int Antenna Key (unique identifier in database)
This table shows Model Data:
Type Description
Int Model Data Version Number (2)
Int Model key
Boolean (stored as one byte) Use Clutter Heights
Boolean (stored as one byte) Use Mobile Heights
41 x float 41 model parameters (e.g. k1, k2, etc.)
Float frequency (MHz)
Float Earth Radius
Float Mobile Height
6 x int 6 additional model parameters
Array of 256 floats Clutter Offsets
Array of 256 floats Clutter Heights
Array of 256 floats Mobile Heights
Array of 256 floats Clutter Separations
Prediction Path Loss Section
The prediction file contains path loss information for a rectangular area (usually
square but this is not a requirement). The path-loss is stored as a byte (0-200dB) with
a 200dB loss is assumed to be infinite.
The total number of bytes is calculated as follows:
Width (rows) = (Eastmax - Eastmin) / resolution
Height (columns) = (Northmax - Northmin) / resolution
Number of bytes = Width x Height
Type Description
Array of Bytes Path Loss
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 29
Version 4.0
Extracting Information From the File
Integer values are stored as 32 bit 2s complement values (4 bytes). In the file they are
stored in the standard IBM PC compatible representation (reverse-word, least
significant byte first).
Floats or floating point numbers are stored according to the ANSI/IEEE 754
Standard for Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic. This is the same as the PC.
Traffic Raster
A traffic raster consists of two files with the same name but different extensions .
tri for the geo-reference information and .trr for the actual traffic raster data.
This information is contained in the TRI file:
Field Description
Xmin Space separated minimum X region co-ordinate
Xmax Space separated maximum X region co-ordinate
Ymin Space separated minimum Y region co-ordinate
Ymax Space separated maximum Y region co-ordinate
Region size Resolution in metres
Switching
type
Type of traffic where:
Circuit switched traffic = 0
Packet switched traffic = 1
HSCSD traffic = 2
3g traffic = 3
Number of
terminal
spread
The number of terminals spread
Timestamp Date and time when the file was created
Comments Optional comments field
The TRR file stores raster data in binary format similar to that of height and clutter
data. Each item of traffic must be an integer (four bytes):
Field Description
Traffic data Traffic data
Circuit switched traffic is in Timeslot Erlangs
Packet switched traffic is in terminals
HSCSD traffic is in User Erlangs
3g traffic is in milli terminals per square km. To convert to terminals per pixel,
multiply the area represented by pixels in
9 2
10

x m
Note : These values are traffic densities per pixel and not absolute traffic per pixel.
A 30 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Example Traffic Raster Files
This picture shows an example of a TRI file:
TRI file showing geo-reference information
This picture shows an example TRR file:
TRR file showing traffic data in hex
View Favourites
Favourites are usually defined via the ENTERPRISE map view user interface but can
be created / modified programmatically using the file format described as follows.
There are three sections; a header, a display list section and an array section. The
first is compulsory, whereas the second and third are optional.
Favourites File Header Section
The header section is compulsory and contains data such as the geographic and
screen co-ordinates of the Map View window.
Field name Data type Length
(bytes)
Description Byte offset
FILEID CHAR 10 VIEWFAVRIT 0
FILEVER CHAR 3 01A 10
FAVNAME CHAR 128 Name of the favourite 13
FAVCOMMENT CHAR 512 Descriptive comments (entered
by the user)
141
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 31
Version 4.0
PROJECTNUM INT 4 ID of the project which
favourite belongs to
653
EASTMIN INT 4 East min. co-ordinate of
favourite
657
EASTMAX INT 4 East max. co-ordinate of
favourite
661
NORTHMIN INT 4 North min. co-ordinate of
favourite
665
NORTHMAX INT 4 North max. co-ordinate of
favourite
669
WNDLEFT INT 4 Left screen co-ordinate of
window
673
WNDTOP INT 4 Top screen co-ordinate of
window
677
WNDRIGHT INT 4 Right screen co-ordinate of
window
681
WNDBOTTOM INT 4 Bottom screen co-ordinate of
window
685
Favourites Display List Section
The display list section is optional, but if used, allows the favourite to redisplay any
of the display list data types such as vectors, clutter, heights and maps.
Field name Data type Length
(bytes)
Description Byte offset
DLNUM INT 4 Number of display list items stored
with this favourite
689
Then, for each display list item up to the DLNUM value the following section is
repeated:
Field name Data type Length
(bytes)
Description Byte offset
DLNAME CHAR 64 Display list name text Dynamically
calculated
DLPRIORITY INT 4 Drawing priority (layer) of
display list item
Dynamically
calculated
Favourites Arrays Section
The array section is optional, but if used, allows the favourite to redisplay pre-saved
arrays.
Field name Data type Length
(bytes)
Description Byte offset
ARRAYNUM SHORT 2 Number of array files stored
with this favourite
Dynamically
calculated
A 32 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Then, for each array file list item up to the ARRAYNUM value the following section
is repeated:
Field name Data type Length
(bytes)
Description
ARRAYFNAME CHAR 255 Array filename (no path)
ARRAYTYPE INT 4 Type of array stored in file. Currently supported
types:
1 = Coverage
2 = Interference
3 = Traffic
NEPTUNE Data Formats
This section describes the following NEPTUNE data formats:
Site Database
Carriers
Neighbours
Important : Except where otherwise mentioned, spaces in text files are treated as
delimiters. Therefore, if you have spaces within names of models, antennas, carrier
layers and so on, you need to remove them. It is recommended that you replace
them with underscores or run the words together, for example, Flat Terrain becomes
FlatTerrain. This may mean temporarily changing your existing ENTERPRISE
names so that items will match those from the import file. After a successful import,
you can change the names back again.
Warning : If an export is made from a database that uses spaces, it will not be
possible to import without editing the file manually.
Site Database
ENTERPRISE can import from and export to the NEPTUNE site database files; the
specification of which follows.
The site database file is in a simple ASCII tab-separated text format, designed to be
easy to use in Microsoft Excel, and for easy conversion to and from other formats.
All data pertaining to a particular site is on the same line in the file.
Header Record (1st Line)
The header record is:
NEPTUNE V1.7 SITE DATABASE <date> <time>
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 33
Version 4.0
Site Data Record (1 per Site)
The site data record is:
Field Data Type Description
Site ID char[32] Site Identifier
Easting /
Longitude
Float The x-coordinate of the site (metres or decimal degrees).
Northing / Latitude Float The y-coordinate of the site (metres or decimal degrees).
Site Status flags int[5] Numeric Representation of the site status flags
Note : If you do not have any status flags, you will have 5
zeros in the file
Ground Height Float Site Height in metres above mean sea level.
Hex Radius Flag Int 0 gives default value
Sector Code int Number of sectors
Sector Data Record (1 per Sector)
The sector data record is:
Field Data Type Description
Azimuth float Direction of sector (degrees)
Power float Tx Power of sector (dBm)
Tilt float Downtilt of sector (degrees)
Antenna Name char[32] Type of antenna (no spaces)
Antenna Height float Height of antenna above ground (metres).
Model Name char[32] Prediction model (no spaces)
Site name (1 per Site)
The site name is:
Field Data Type Description
Site Name char[32] Name of site. This can contain spaces but cannot contain
other characters such as commas.
NEPTUNE Site File Examples
Example of a Site with 2 sectors and co-ordinates in Easting/Northing:
NEPTUNE V1.7 SITE DATABASE 12:23:21 8/11/2000
A1001 456000 500123 1 0 2 0 0 0.0 0 2 0 55 0 K60 15.0 Rural 180 55 0 K60 17.0 Rural
Aston Park
A 34 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Example of an Omni site with co-ordinates in Longitude/Latitude:
Five zeros for
status flags
Ground
Height
NEPTUNE Carriers
The NEPTUNE carriers file is a simple ASCII tab-delimited text format designed to
be easy to use in Microsoft Excel and similar products and for easy conversion to
and from other formats.
All data pertaining to a particular cell is on the same line in the file.
Header Record (1st line in the file)
The header record is:
NEPTUNE V1.7 CARRIER DATABASE<time> <date>
Carrier Data Record (1 per cell)
The carrier data record is:
Field Data Type Description
Site ID char[32] Site Identifier
Sector int identifies the cell by sector number (ordered by azimuth)
LAC int Local Area Code (0 if not used or unknown)
BSIC int Base Station Identity Code
BCCH int The BCCH is always the first carrier listed
TCHs int Space separated list of carrier numbers
Example of typical entries:
A1001 1 0 45 117 63 73 83
A1001 2 0 46 98 75
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 35
Version 4.0
NEPTUNE Neighbours
The NEPTUNE Neighbours file is in a simple ASCII tab-separated text format
designed to be easy to use in Microsoft Excel and similar products, and for easy
conversion to and from other formats.
All data pertaining to a particular cell is on the same line in the file.
Note : This is the format used by ENTERPRISE to load and save neighbours using
the menu options found in the Tools Menu of ENTERPRISE.
Header Record (1st line in the file)
The header record is:
NEPTUNE V1.7 NEIGHBOUR DATABASE <time> <date>
Neighbour Relationship Record (1 for each relationship)
This is:
Field Data Type Description
Site ID char[32] Site Identifier
Sector int Sector number
Neighbour Record (1 for each neighbour)
This is:
Field Data Type Description
Site ID char[32] Site Identifier
Sector int Sector number of the neighbouring cell
Margin int Separation margin (dBm), default = 2
Example of typical entry: A cell with 3 neighbours.
A1001 1 A1001 2 2 A1008 1 2 A1009 1 2
A 36 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Miscellaneous Vendor Formats
This reference section contains information on the miscellaneous vendor formats.
Important : Except where otherwise mentioned, spaces in text files are treated as
delimiters. Therefore, if you have spaces within names of models, antennas, carrier
layers and so on, you need to remove them. It is recommended that you replace
them with underscores or run the words together, for example, Flat Terrain becomes
FlatTerrain. This may mean temporarily changing your existing ENTERPRISE
names so that items will match those from the import file. After a successful import,
you can change the names back again.
Warning : If an export is made from a database that uses spaces, it will not be
possible to import without editing the file manually.
Antenna Diagrams
ENTERPRISE must first import antenna diagrams before they can be used within
the application. A header section begins the antenna file that must contain at a
minimum the antenna name field. The complete list of fields is given below:
Field Description
NAME Antenna name
MAKE Make / manufacturer
FREQUENCY Frequency (MHz)
H_WIDTH Horizontal beamwidth (degrees)
V_WIDTH Vertical beamwidth (degrees)
FRONT_TO_BACK Front to back ratio (dB)
GAIN Antenna gain (dBi)
Warning: You must enter the value followed by a space followed by dBi
TILT Tilt type (ELECTRICAL / MECHANICAL / CROSS POLAR)
COMMENTS Additional comments
After the header follow two sections prefixed with the name of the particular pattern
that will be described, that is, HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL, and the number of
points. The number of points need not equal 360.
Each successive row then contains the following variables separated by a space:
Field Description
Angle Angle of data point from the main forward beam direction anticlockwise
(degrees)
Loss Relative to the maximum (dB)
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 37
Version 4.0
Example Antenna File
An example antenna file is shown below:
NAME 085_2_18
MAKE AntennasRUs
FREQUENCY 900
H_WIDTH 85
V_WIDTH 10
FRONT_TO_BACK 0
GAIN 18 dBi
TILT MECHANICAL
COMMENTS Standard 85-degree antenna
HORIZONTAL 360
0.0 0.0
1.0 0.0
2.0 0.0
....
353.0 0.1
354.0 0.1
358.0 0.1
359.0 0.0
VERTICAL 360
0.0 0.4
1.0 0.0
3.0 1.1
...
355.0 25.4
356.0 16.5
359.0 2.3
The final row is terminated by a carriage return. No additional data should be
present after the pattern section, as this will be ignored.
Miscellaneous Vendors Carriers File Format
ENTERPRISE can import and export EET R2C / Planet 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8 GSM
carrier databases.
The file formats described here are version 2.8.
The Carriers file is in a simple ASCII space-delimited text format.
EET/Planet AMPS Carriers File Format
For AMPS, the EET/Planet Carriers file contains the following fields. The first three
fields are tab-separated and the remaining fields are separated by spaces:
Field Data Type Description
Site ID CHAR Alphanumeric site identity. This must be the same
as the site id in the Site Database file.
This should be followed by a tab.
Sector INT Number representing sector (or GSM cell) for cell
site.
This should be followed by a tab.
Number of Carriers
Allocated
INT Number of carriers allocated (maximum of 80 per
cell).
This should be followed by a tab.
Carrier1, Carrier2, etc. INT Space separated list of channel numbers.
A 38 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Number of Carriers
Required
INT Number of carriers required for that sector.
Cell ID CHAR Alphanumeric cell identity.
Cntrl INT Control.
DCC INT Signal Digital Colour Code.
- - Not used, a must be placed here.
Cell INT Cell identifier. Used only if Sector = 1.
If not used, a must be placed here.
MSC STRING Mobile Switching Centre (up to 16 characters).
Used only if Sector = 1.
If not used, a must be placed here.
UDCP CHAR Two character field for the user defined character
plot.
Carrier Type1, Carrier
Type2, etc.
CHAR Space separated list of carrier types (one per
allocated channel).
Number of Carrier Type
Demands
INT The number of carrier types demanded.
Carrier Type1, Demand,
Carrier Type2, Demand,
etc.
CHAR and INT Space separated list of carrier type name and
carrier type demanded.
Example EET/Planet AMPS Carriers File
The following shows an example EET/Planet AMPS carriers file:
123 1 3 100 104 108 6 - - 1 2 3 121 45 TCH1 TCH1 TCH2 2 TCH1 3 TCH2 1
123 2 6 114 118 122 126 130 134 6 - - 2 3 - - - TCH1 TCH1 TCH2 TCH2 TCH1 TCH1 1 TCH1 3
123 3 2 130 134 6 - - 2 3 - - - TCH1 TCH2 2 TCH1 3 TCH2 2
EET/Planet GSM Carriers File Format
For GSM, the EET/Planet Carriers file contains these fields. The first three fields are
tab-separated and the remaining fields are separated by spaces.
Field Data Type Description
Site ID CHAR Alphanumeric site identity. This must be the same
as the site id in the Site Database file.
This should be followed by a tab.
Sector INT Number representing sector (or GSM cell) for cell
site.
This can be 0.
This should be followed by a tab.
Number of Carriers
Allocated
INT Number of carriers allocated (maximum of 80 per
cell).
This should be followed by a tab.
Carrier1, Carrier2, etc. INT Space separated list of channel numbers.
Number of Carriers
Required
INT Number of carriers required for that sector.
LAC INT Location Area Code.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 39
Version 4.0
Cell ID CHAR Alphanumeric cell identity.
BCCH INT Broadcast Control Channel.
BSIC INT Base Station Identity Code.
- - Not used, a must be placed here.
MCC INT Mobile Country Code.
BSC STRING Base Station Controller (up to 6 characters).
MSC STRING Mobile Switching Centre (up to 16 characters).
UDCP CHAR Two character field for the user defined character
plot.
Carrier Type1, Carrier
Type2, etc.
CHAR Space separated list of carrier types (one per
allocated channel).
Number of Carrier Type
Demands
INT The number of carrier types demanded.
Carrier Type1, Demand,
Carrier Type2, Demand,
etc.
CHAR and INT Space separated list of carrier type name and
carrier type demanded.
Example EET/Planet GSM Carriers File
The following shows an example EET/Planet GSM carriers file:
Site1 1 2 6 59 2 13478 Site1A 6 15 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH TCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 1
Site1 2 1 9 1 13478 Site1B 9 14 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 0
Site1 3 1 2 1 13478 Site1C 2 1 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 0
Site2 1 1 5 1 13478 Site2A 5 4 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 0
Site2 2 2 2 39 2 13478 Site2B 2 1 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH TCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 1
Site2 3 2 8 52 2 13478 Site2C 8 2 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH TCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 1
Site3 1 2 5 51 2 13478 Site3A 5 3 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH TCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 1
Site3 2 2 11 48 2 13478 Site3B 11 7 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH TCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 1
Site3 3 2 7 58 2 13478 Site3C 7 7 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH TCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 1
Site4 1 1 8 1 13478 Site4A 8 1 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 0
Site4 2 1 6 1 13478 Site4B 6 12 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 0
Site4 3 1 2 1 13478 Site4C 2 17 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 0
Site5 1 1 2 1 13478 Site5A 2 13 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 0
Site5 2 2 10 49 2 13478 Site5B 10 7 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH TCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 1
Site5 3 1 4 1 13478 Site5C 4 13 - 0 BSC0 MSC0 0 BCCH 2 BCCH 1 TCH 0
Carrier Types
The carrier types database is made up of three separate ASCII text files.
Carrier Names File
The carrier names file, carrier_types.names, holds details of the assignment of names
to carriers. An example follows:
HEADER EET V2.7 Carrier Names File. VERSION 1.0
NAME 1
INDEX 1
NAME 1026
INDEX 2
NAME 2
INDEX 3
...
A 40 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Carrier Types File
The carrier types file, carrier_types.types, holds details of the assignment of carriers
to types. An example follows:
HEADER EET V2.7 Carrier Types File. VERSION 1.0
NAME cntrl
SYMBOL +
MAX_ALLOCATION 1
REQUIRED 5
CARRIER 1
CARRIER 1025
CARRIER 2
CARRIER 1026
...
NAME tch
SYMBOL -
MAX_ALLOCATION 0
REQUIRED 15
CARRIER 1
CARRIER 1025
CARRIER 2
CARRIER 1026
...
Carrier Groups File
The carrier groups file, carrier_types.groups holds the details of the assignment of
channels to groups. Each line holds space-delimited data on one group. The format
is shown below:
Group1 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 etc.
Group2 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 etc.
Group is the group name (CHAR) and C is the channel number (INT). A typical file
entry might be:
A1 1 5
A2 9 13
A3 17 21
B1 2 6
B2 10 14
B3 18 22
C1 15 7
C2 11 15
C3 19 23
D1 16 8
D2 12 16
D3 20 24
Group A1 consists of channels 1 and 5, group A2 consists of channels 9 and 13, etc.
A maximum of 80 frequency groups and a maximum 71 carriers per group can be
included in the carrier groups file a constraint not of ENTERPRISE but of
EET/Planet.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 41
Version 4.0
Miscellaneous Vendors Exceptions File Format
ENTERPRISE can import and export EET R2C / Planet 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8
Exceptions databases. This table shows the specification of the file format:
Field Data Type Description
Header CHAR Contains version information
Optimise_Which INT Which threshold to optimise on (used only by
optimising algorithms
0=Absolute Area, 1=Percent Area, 2=Percent
Traffic )
CARRIER_TYPE CHAR Carrier type identity
CARRIER_TYPE
COST_FACTOR
FLOAT Indicates that the following lines are a list of
carrier types and their associated cost factor.
Thresholds
Thresholds on the preceding CARRIER_TYPE for:
Field Data Type Description
Absolute Area FLOAT Absolute affected area in km
2
Percent Area FLOAT Percent affected area.
Absolute Traffic FLOAT Absolute affected traffic in mE.
Percent Traffic FLOAT Percent affected traffic.
Spacings
Minimum channel spacings on the preceding CARRIER_TYPE for:
Field Data Type Description
Min_Chan_Spacing_Site FLOAT Site
Min_Chan_Spacing_Cell FLOAT Cell
Min_Chan_Spacing_Neighbour FLOAT Neighbour Sites
Min_Chan_Spacing_Neighbour2 FLOAT 2
nd
Order Neighbours
CELL CHAR Site Identity
CELL COST_FACTOR FLOAT Indicates that the following line contains a cost
factor for CELL
GLOBAL ILLEGAL CHANNELS FLOAT Indicates that the following line contains a list of
channels that may not be used anywhere on the
network.
SEPARATIONS CHAR Indicates that the following lines are a list of cells
and separations for the preceding CELL (*
means the separation overrides all others)
ILLEGAL CHANNELS CHAR Indicates that the following line is a space
separated list of illegal channels for the
preceding CELL.
A 42 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
BORDER RESTRICTIONS CHAR Indicates that the following line is a space
separated list of country borders whose channel
restrictions apply to the preceding CELL.
Miscellaneous Vendors Neighbours File Format
ENTERPRISE can import from and export to EET R2C / Planet 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8
GSM neighbour files, the specification of these files is as follows.
This is a simple ASCII space separated text format and consists of five distinct
sections:
Threshold
Cell
Neighbour
Add
Delete
Threshold and Cell
This table describes the format of the Threshold and Cell sections:
Field Data Type Description
THRESHOLDS INT Four integer fields representing Max Neighbours, Min
Neighbours, Min Border Squares and Min Border Percent
respectively.
CELL CHAR CELL indicates that the Site ID following is the serving
cell.
Site ID CHAR Unique identifier for the site.
Sector (cell) INT Sector number.
BSIC INT Not used.
BCCH INT Not used.
HO RxLev INT Not used.
Number of
Neighbours
INT Number of neighbours following in the file.
Neighbour
This table describes the format of the Neighbour section:
Field Data Type Description
NBR CHAR NBR indicates that the Site ID is the neighbour of the last
serving cell.
Site ID CHAR Unique identifier for the site.
Sector (cell) INT Sector number.
HO Margin INT Handover Margin
HO RxLev Min INT The minimum handover receiver level.
Max Distance INT Not Used.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 43
Version 4.0
RxQual INT Not Used.
Add and Delete
This table describes the format of the Add and Delete sections:
Field Description
Added Lists cells added manually to the neighbour list. Other fields as previously
described.
Deleted Lists cells deleted manually to the neighbour list. Other fields as previously
described.
Example Neighbours File
A truncated sample neighbours file: for EET/Planet is shown here:
THRESHOLDS 10 3 10 5
CELL XY001 1 0 0 0 3
NBR XY001 3 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY001b 1 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY011 2 0 -120 100000 0
CELL XY001 2 0 0 0 3
NBR XY001b 2 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY011 2 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY006c 2 0 -120 100000 0
ADDED
CELL XY001 1 0 0 0 2
NBR XY002 2 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY002c 2 0 -120 100000 0
CELL XY001 2 0 0 0 1
NBR XY001b 1 0 -120 100000 0
DELETED
CELL XY019 1 0 0 0 7
NBR XY017h 1 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY019h 1 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY019h 2 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY019h 3 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY036 1 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY036 2 0 -120 100000 0
NBR XY036 3 0 -120 100000 0
Miscellaneous Vendors Site Database File Format
ENTERPRISE can import and export the EET R2C / Planet 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8
simple text site database file format. The specification of these files is as shown in
the tables in this section.
This section gives information on:
Planet 2.8 site database
Planet 2.5 site database
A 44 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
An example of a Planet 2.8 site database file is:
V2.8 Site Database written on Mon Nov 22 13:42:38 1999
SITE_FORMAT EiRP : Do not delete this line
SECTOR_FORMAT : Do not delete this line
CELL_INFO_FORMAT : Do not delete this line
SITE 15A -61.713401 30.192341 7 2 1 6 0 4.21 0 3 Long Bridge
SECTOR 40 55 0.0 60_Sector_PCS_Dapa_DP59200 48.77 URBAN
CELLINFO RBS2201 Non-Balanced 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 35.00
SECTOR 160 55.20 0.0 60_Sector_PCS_Comsat_PCSA090190 48.77 URBAN
CELLINFO RBS2201 Non-Balanced 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 35.00
SECTOR 280 55.32 0.0 60_Sector_PCS_Dapa_DP59200 48.77 URBAN
CELLINFO RBS2201 Non-Balanced 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 35.00
Header Records for Planet 2.8 Site Database File Format
One of each of the following records per file:
The Version record format is:
Field Data Type Description
Version Identifier CHAR[] Identifies the version of EET that was used to store
the database. For version 2.8 this is V2.8.
Optional Message CHAR[] The time and date that the database was last
stored.
The Site Data record format is:
Field Data Type Description
Site Format CHAR[] ERP or EiRP
Note : The Sector Data and Cell Data record formats are not used by ENTERPRISE
but must exist in file.
Data Records for Planet 2.8 Site Database File Format
One Site Data Record per site:
Field Data Type Description
Keyword CHAR[4] SITE identifies the record.
Site ID CHAR[11] Unique identifier for the site.
Easting/Longitude FLOAT The x-coordinate of the site (meters or decimal
degrees).
Northing/Latitude FLOAT The y-co-ordinate of the site (meters or decimal
degrees).
Site Status Flags INT[5] Numeric representation of the site status flags.
Ground Height FLOAT The height of the site above mean sea level
(meters).
Hexagon Flag INT Numeric representation of the hexagon radius and
type.
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 45
Version 4.0
Site Type Flag INT A decimal number of up to three digits that has the
site type and number of sectors encoded into it, as
follows:
--N = Number of Sectors (N in range 1 to 6)
0- = Macrocell
3- = Microcell
1-- = Repeater Site
Site Name CHAR[23] Because this is an optional string that can contain
anything (including spaces), the delimiter is a
special character
The ASCII code for this is 255.
Site Name 2 CHAR[23] Because this is an optional string that can contain
anything (including spaces), the delimiter is a
special character
The ASCII code for this is 255.
Narrative CHAR[80]
Sector Data Record
One per sector of every site:
Field Data Type Description
Keyword CHAR[6] SECTOR identifies this record.
Alignment FLOAT Angle from North of sector (degrees).
Power FLOAT ERP or EiRP of sector (dBm) depending on the value of the
Site Format field in the Header Record. All power values
should be consistent (all ERP or all EiRP).
Tilt FLOAT Downtilt of sector (degrees).
Antenna Name CHAR[99] Name of antenna (no spaces allowed).
Antenna Height FLOAT Height of antenna above ground (meters).
Model Name CHAR[31] Name of propagation model (no spaces allowed).
Cell Data Record
One per sector of every site.
Field Data Type Description
Keyword CHAR[8
]
CELLINFO identifies the start of the cell information details.
Equipment Type CHAR[2
1]
The equipment type the cell uses.
Balanced Mobile CHAR[2
1]
Mobile / CE type the cell is presently balanced for. If the cell is
not balanced then defaults to non-balanced.
Equipment Loss FLOAT Sum of all the downlink losses / gains from the presently
selected cell equipment.
Output Power FLOAT Do not change from zero.
Uplink Feeder
Loss
FLOAT The feeder loss applicable to the uplink side.
Downlink Feeder
Loss
FLOAT The feeder loss applicable to the downlink side.
A 46 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Diversity Gain FLOAT The amount of diversity gain from the cell, if applicable.
Uplink Misc. Loss FLOAT The amount of misc. losses on the uplink side.
Downlink Misc.
Loss
FLOAT The amount of misc. losses on the downlink side.
Mobile ERP FLOAT The peak power of the mobile/ CE type for which the cell is
balanced.
GSM Range FLOAT A user definable range (only applicable in GSM systems).
Interference into this cell from other servers will not be
considered, because this cell cannot cover beyond this range.
However, this cell will still interfere into other cells independent
of the range.
Planet V2.5 Site Database Format
The Planet V2.5 site database file is in a simple ASCII tab-separated text format,
designed to be easy to use in Microsoft Excel, and for easy conversion to and from
other formats. All data pertaining to a particular site is on the same line in the file.
Site Data Record (1 per Site)
The site data record is:
Field Data Type Description
Site ID char[32] Site Identifier
Easting /
Longitude
Float The x-coordinate of the site (metres or decimal degrees).
Northing / Latitude Float The y-coordinate of the site (metres or decimal degrees).
Site Status flags int[5] Numeric Representation of the site status flags
Note : If you do not have any status flags, you will have 5
zeros in the file
Ground Height Float Ground Height in metres above sea level (0 indicates that
DTM map data value is to be used)
Antenna Height Float Antenna Height in metres above ground level (one value for
all sectors)
Hex Radius Flag Int 0 gives default value
Sector Count int Number of sectors
Model Name char[32] Prediction model (no spaces allowed) one per site
Sector Data Record (1 per Sector)
The number of sector data records is determined by the Sector Count value in the
Site Data Record. The sector data record is:
Field Data Type Description
Azimuth float Direction of sector main beam (degrees)
Power float EiRP of sector (dBm)
Tilt float Downtilt of sector (degrees) positive value indicates
downtilt
Antenna Name char[32] Type of antenna (no spaces allowed)
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 47
Version 4.0
Site name (1 per Site)
The site name is:
Field Data Type Description
Site Name char[32] Name of site. This can contain spaces but cannot contain
other characters such as commas.
Status Flags
Flag definition in ENTERPRISE can be performed in two ways, either using the Flag
Administrator tool or via text file import. The file format required is very similar to
that of EET R2C / Planet 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8 but with a subtle difference each flag
row must be proceeded by a flag heading name.
Each group of two lines of the file represents the values of each flag.
The fields are delimited by white-space. Consequently, it is not possible to have a
space in the name of a flag heading or value. It is possible to improve the legibility
of flag headings and values after import using the flag editor tool.
An example flag file is shown below:
Phase
- Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 Phase4
Site_Type
- Theo Candidate Nominated
Region
- North South East West Central
Source
- Ericsson Nokia Siemens Motorola Nortel Alcatel
The final row is terminated by a carriage return.
A 48 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Colour Palette File Format
The colour palette file is a text file which contains three tab separated columns. The
values detail the RGB values for the 253 colours that are used in your project. 0 0 0 is
black and 255 255 255 is white.
For example:
0 0 0
255 255 255
255 0 0
255 128 0
255 255 0
0 255 0
0 0 255
255 0 255
165 42 42
255 105 180
200 200 255
165 165 255
130 130 255
0 0 255
0 0 215
0 0 175
200 255 200
165 255 165
0 255 0
0 225 0
0 195 0
0 165 0
255 255 190
255 255 145
255 255 0
225 225 0
195 195 0
165 165 0
255 189 123
255 176 98
255 164 72
255 128 0
219 109 0
206 103 0
255 190 190
255 160 160
255 130 130
255 100 100
255 0 0
215 0 0
50 240 200
0 240 150
0 240 75
0 200 30
0 175 0
0 150 0
0 128 0
70 128 10
90 128 20
110 128 30
120 130 25
140 135 25
150 140 20
160 140 15
170 130 10
165 120 25
145 110 25
135 90 20
125 80 15
120 70 10
120 60 20
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide A 49
Version 4.0
120 50 30
120 50 50
120 50 70
120 55 90
120 60 110
120 80 120
120 90 120
120 100 120
120 110 120
121 121 121
128 128 128
135 135 135
142 142 142
149 149 149
166 166 166
172 172 172
178 178 178
184 184 184
190 190 190
196 196 196
202 202 202
208 208 208
214 214 214
220 220 220
226 226 226
232 232 232
238 238 238
244 244 244
250 250 250

A 50 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Site Information Survey Form B 1
Version 4.0
B Collecting Site Information
Example Site Information Survey Form
This chapter contains a sample Site Information Survey form. You may not need
every single piece of information contained here but if you do complete this form,
you will be in possession of the minimum amount of information that you might
need before beginning to plan your network using the ENTERPRISE suite.
General
Site ID
Address
Postcode/Zip
Latitude
Longitude
Ground Height
Contact Person
Contact Phone No.
B 2 Site Information Survey Form
Version 4.0
Visual Inspection
Accessibility
All Year Yes / No
24 Hour Access Yes / No
Means of access
Site Description
Distance
Distance from nearest buildings
Distance to main road
AC power available: Yes / No
If Yes: Distance _______________
Open or covered Open / Covered
Security required Yes / No
Demographics
Urban
%
Suburban
%
Industrial
%
Open fields
%
Snow
%
Tourist area
%
Site Information Survey Form B 3
Version 4.0
Existing Networks
Nearest competitor mast
Other types of networks in area
Other types of services
Neighbours
Visible Masts
Available Photographs
Aerial Yes / No
Site Yes / No
Panoramic Yes / No
Line of Sight
Please indicate all structures
higher than average along with
type of construction
Distance from mast of nearest
obstruction
B 4 Site Information Survey Form
Version 4.0
Test and Cell Information
Mast Height
Maximum free mast height
(according to local regulations)
LOS Information
TX Power
Site ID
Site name
Latitude
Longitude
Mast Type
TX Azimuth
TX Height
TX Power
Antenna type
Feeder Type
Feeder Length
Connector Loss
Frequency
Operators Name
Comments
Start Date
Start Time
End Date
End Time
Site Information Survey Form B 5
Version 4.0
CW Measurements
Frequency
CW Distance from Mast
CW Equipment Used
Time of Day
Date
Ground Height
Map Resolution
Min dB
Transmitter Location (Lat/Long)
Max dB
Data Sheet Attached Yes / No
Height Profile from Map Data in Asset
Site to BSC Yes / No
Site to Closest Neighbour Yes / No
Neighbours
NBR
Site ID
Sector
HO Margin
Min HO Rx Level
Max HO Rx Level
Max Distance
RX Qual.
B 6 Site Information Survey Form
Version 4.0
Frequency Available
Working Frequency
Channels Available
From:
To:
Distance from BSC
Link Distance Km
Available overhead network Yes / No
Thresholds
Site ID
Serving Cell ID
Sector/Cell
BSIC
BCCH
HO Rx Level
Number of neighbours
Site Information Survey Form B 7
Version 4.0
Service Information
Equipment
Antenna
Manufacturer
Model Number
VSWR
Gain (dBi)
Azimuth
Downtilt
Frequency
H-Width
V-Width
Front to Back ratio
Radiation pattern included Yes/No
Tilt
Comments
Preferred Mast Type
Manufacturer
Part No.
Average Height
B 8 Site Information Survey Form
Version 4.0
BTS Equipment
Manufacturer
Part Number
System Loss
Cell Equipment
Manufacturer
Part Number
System Loss
Feeder Type
Manufacturer
Part Number
Loss Per Metre
Length
Diameter
Site Information Survey Form B 9
Version 4.0
Connector
Manufacturer
Part Number
Connector Loss
Type
Dimension
Combiner
Manufacturer
Part Number
Combiner Loss
Type
Dimension
Map Data
UTM Zone Yes / No
Diffraction Method Yes / No
Ellipsoid
Clutter Data Resolution :
Scanned Maps Scale :
Aerial Photographs Scale
Vectors Yes / No
B 10 Site Information Survey Form
Version 4.0
Coverage Level Requirements
Urban
Suburban
Industrial
Open Fields
Railroads
Motorways
Major Roads
Coverage Report
Total Coverage %
Existing Site
Mast Height
Mast Type
Existing Site Equipment
Handover Margins
Minimum Handover Margin
Erlang Rate
Current Erlang Rate
Required Rate
Site Information Survey Form B 11
Version 4.0
Delivery Date
LOS Survey
CW Measurement
Cell Planning
Frequency Channels Available
To:
From:
Estimated Traffic
Forecast
Current
Blocking rates
Current rate
B 12 Site Information Survey Form
Version 4.0
Network Connections
Microwave Antennas
Gain dBi
Gain dBm
Frequency Band
Minimum Operating Frequency
Maximum Operating Frequency
Front to Back Ratio
Polarisation
Diameter
Cost
Connection Type
Microwave
Optical Fibre
Copper
Satellite
LOS Information
Minimum Height
Status
Model
Site Information Survey Form B 13
Version 4.0
Predictions
Method
Geoclimatic Factor K
Climate Terrain Factor
Rainfall
Unchanged
Climatic Region
Specific
Rainfall % mm/h
Exceptions %
MW Antennas
Dry Radome Loss dB
Height
Wet Radome Loss dB
Feeder Type
Feeder Length m
Feeder Loss
Diversity Type
Div. Antenna Height m
Refractivity Value
Frequency Separation GHz
Separation Angle
Elevation Angle
B 14 Site Information Survey Form
Version 4.0
Frequency
Band
Channel
Centre GHz
Bandwidth
Power
Tx Power dBm
Tx Attenuator
Rx Attenuator
Operating Mode
Tx Branching Loss
Rx Branching Loss
Terrain Type
Overland
Over Medium Bodies
Over Large Bodies
Site Information Survey Form B 15
Version 4.0
Radio Equipment
Manufacturer
Equipment family
Min Tx-Power dBm
Max Tx-Power dBm
MTBF (year)
FKTB
Threshold dBm @ BER
Radio Type
Frequency band
Minimum Operating Frequency
Maximum Operating Frequency
Radio Frequency Bandwith
Radio Capacity Mbit/s
Duplexing Method
Building Mounted
Cabin Mounted
Link Terminal Equipment
Input Type
Output Type
B 16 Site Information Survey Form
Version 4.0
Feeder Info
Frequency
Loss Per Metre
Total Connector Loss
Repeater
Name
Location
Latitude
Longitude

ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide C 1
Version 4.0
C Coordinate Systems and
Datums
About Coordinate Systems and Datums
In ENTERPRISE, you must set the correct co-ordinate system for your project in
order for your map data to be valid. You can set your co-ordinate system in the
Modify Project dialog box.
ENTERPRISE supports a large range of co-ordinate systems, and associated
information. This chapter contains information on the following:
Supported co-ordinate systems
Supported projections
Supported ellipsoids
Supported datums
C 2 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Supported Co-ordinate Systems
ENTERPRISE supports the following co-ordinate systems:
Australian Co-ordinate Systems
Austrian Co-ordinate Systems
Belgian Co-ordinate Systems
Borneo RSO Grids
British Co-ordinate Systems
Colombia Co-ordinate Systems
Co-ordinate Systems of Argentina
Co-ordinate Systems of Bahrain
Co-ordinate Systems of Egypt
Co-ordinate Systems of Ghana
Co-ordinate Systems of India
Co-ordinate Systems of Iraq
Co-ordinate Systems of Italy
Cuban Co-ordinate Systems
French Co-ordinate Systems
Gauss-Kruger 3TM Co-ordinate Systems
Gauss-Kruger 6TM Co-ordinate Systems
Gauss-Kruger (Pulkovo 1942) Co-ordinate Systems
Geodetic Latitude / Longitude
Greek-Grid
Iraq Co-ordinate Systems
Irish Co-ordinate Systems
Japanese Co-ordinate Systems
New Zealand Map Grid
New Zealand Co-ordinate Systems
Netherlands Co-ordinate Systems
Netherlands East Indies Coord
New Brunswick Co-ordinate Systems
Nigerian-Systems
Peruvian-Systems
Philippine Co-ordinate Systems
Philippine-Zones
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide C 3
Version 4.0
Projections of a Hemisphere
Qatar Co-ordinate Systems
Quebec Modified TM Co-ordinate Systems
Quebec Modified TM NAD27
Romanian Co-ordinate Systems
Universal Polar Stereographic Co-ordinate Systems
Universal Transverse Mercator
US State Plane 1927
US State Plane 1927 (Exact solution)
US State Plane 1983
Veracruz Co-ordinate Systems
World Projections
XYZ Cartesian ECEF
C 4 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Supported Map Projections
ENTERPRISE supports the following map projections:
Albers Equal Area
Azimuthal Equal Area
Azimuthal Equidistant
Bonne
Cassini
Equal Area Cylindrical
Equidistant Conic.
Equidistant Cylindrical
Hotline Oblique Mercator (2 Points)
Hotline Oblique Mercator (1 Point and Azimuth)
IMW Polyconic.
Lambert Conformal Conic.
Lambert Tangential
Macerator
Miller Cylindrical
Mollweide
Orthographic
Polar Azimuthal Equal Area
Polar Azimuthal Equidistant
Polar Stereographic
Polyconic.
Robinson
Sinusoidal
Space Oblique Mercator
Stereographic
Stereographic 70
Transverse Mercator
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide C 5
Version 4.0
Supported Ellipsoids
ENTERPRISE supports the following ellipsoids:
Ellipsoid Name Semi-Major Axis Flattening Comments
Airy 1830 6377563.396 299.32496460
0
Airy 1849 6377340.189 299.32496401
74
Modified Airy 6377340.189 299.32496460
0
Australian
National
6378160.000 298.25000000
0
Average
Terrestrial
System 1977
6378135 298.257
Bessel 1841 6377397.155 299.15281281
56
Ethiopia Indonesia
Japan and Korea
Bessel 1841 -
Namibia
6377483.865 299.15281281
56
Namibia
Bessel Modified 6377397.155 299.15281535
13
Bessel - RT90 6377397.1542 299.15281285
Bessel - NGO
1948
6377492.018 299.15281
Clarke 1858 6378294.000 294.3
Clarke 1858 - 1 6378293.639 294.26068
Clarke 1866 6378206.400 294.97869820
0
Clarke 1866 for
Michigan
6378450.047484481 294.97869820
0
Clarke 1880 6378249.145 293.46500000
0
Clarke 1880 for
Arc 1950
6378249.145326 293.46663076
Clarke 1880
IGN
6378249.2 293.4660213
Clarke 1880 for
Jamaica
6378249.136 293.46631
Clarke 1880 for
Merchich
6378249.2 293.46598
Clarke 1880 for
Palestine
6378300.79 293.46623
Clarke 1880
(SGA 1922)
6378249.2 293.46598
Everest - Brunei 6377298.556 300.80170000
0
Everest 1830
(modified)
6377298.561 300.80170000
0
C 6 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Timbalai
Everest - 1830 6377276.345 300.80169996
95
India
Everest 1830
Kalianpur
6377301.243 1.7976931348
62e+308
Modified for Kalianpur
Everest - 1956 6377301.243 300.80169996
95
India
Everest - 1948 6377304.063 300.80169996
95
West Malaysia and
Singapore
Everest - 1969 6377295.664 300.80169996
95
West Malaysia
Everest -
Pakistan
6377309.613 300.8017
Fischer 1960 6378166.000 298.30000000
0
Modified
Fischer 1966
6378155.000 298.30000000
0
Fischer 1968 6378150.000 298.30000000
0
GEM 10C 6378137 298.25722
GRS 1967 6378160.000 298.24716742
7
GRS 1980 6378137.000 298.25722210
1
Hayford 6378388.000 297.00000000
0
Helmert 1906 6378200.000 298.30000000
0
Hough 6378270.000 297.00000000
0
IAG 75 6378140 298.257222
Indonesian
1974
6378160 298.247
International
1924
6378388.000 297.00000000
0
I.U.G.G. 67 6378160.0 298.25
I.U.G.G. 75 6378140.0 298.257
KAULA 6378165 292.3
Krassovsky
1940
6378245 298.3
MERIT 83 6378137 298.257
New
International
1967
6378157.5 298.25
NWL 9D 6378145 298.25
NWL 10D 6378135 298.26
OSU86F 6378136.2 298.25722
OSU91A 6378136.3 298.25722
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide C 7
Version 4.0
Plessis 1817 6376523.0 308.64
SGS 85 6378136 298.58396881
23
South American
1969
6378160.000 298.25000000
0
Southeast Asia 6378155.0 298.30000020
1
Struve 1860 6378297.0 294.73
Walbeck 6376896.0 302.78
War Office 6378300.583 296
WGS 1960 6378165.000 298.30000000
0
WGS 1966 6378145.000 298.25000000
0
WGS 1972 6378135.000 298.26000000
0
WGS 1984 6378137.000 298.25722356
3
C 8 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Supported Datums
ENTERPRISE supports the following datums:
Datum Name Method Ellipsoid
Adindan - Burkina Faso MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Adindan - Cameroon MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Adindan - Ethiopia MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Adindan - Mali MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Adindan - Mean MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Adindan - MRE Method MRE CLARKE 1880
Adindan - Senegal MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Adindan - Sudan MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Afgooye - Somalia MOLODENSKY KRASSOVSKY
AGD84 BURSA AUSTRALIAN
NATIONAL
Ain El Abd - Bahrain Isl. MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Ain El Abd - Saudi Arabia MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
American Samoa Islands - 1962 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Amersfoort BURSA BESSEL 1841
Anna 1 Astro 1965 MOLODENSKY AUSTRALIAN
NATIONAL
ANS84 BURSA AUSTRALIAN
NATIONAL
Antigua Isl. Astro 1943 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1950 - Botswana MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1950 - Burundi MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1950 - Lesotho MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1950 - Malawi MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1950 - Mean MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1950 - MRE MRE CLARKE 1880
Arc 1950 - Swaziland MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1950 - Zaire MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1950 - Zambia MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1950 - Zimbabwe MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1960 - Mean MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Arc 1960 - MRE MRE CLARKE 1880
Ascension Island 1958 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Astro B4 Sorol Atoll MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Astro Beacon 'E' 1945 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Astro Dos 71/4 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Astronomic Station 1952 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide C 9
Version 4.0
Astro Tern Isl. 1961 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Australian Geodetic 1966 MOLODENSKY AUSTRALIAN
NATIONAL
Australian Geodetic 1966 MRE MRE AUSTRALIAN
NATIONAL
Australian Geodetic 1984 MOLODENSKY AUSTRALIAN
NATIONAL
Australian Geodetic 1984 MRE MRE AUSTRALIAN
NATIONAL
Australian Geodetic Datum 1966 BURSA AUSTRALIAN
NATIONAL
Ayabelle Lighthouse MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Batavia MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Belgium MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Bellevue MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Bellevue MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
Bermuda 1957 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Bermuda 1957 - MRE MRE CLARKE 1866
BIH Terrestrial System BURSA WGS84
Bissau MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Bogota Observatory MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Bogota Observatory - MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
Bukit Rimpah - Bangka & Belitung
Is.
MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Camp Area Astro - Antartica MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Campo Inchausepe MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Campo Inchausepe - MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
Canton Astro 1966 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Canton Astro 1966 - MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
Cape MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Cape 1966 - MRE MRE CLARKE 1880
Cape Canaveral MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Cape Canaveral - MRE MRE CLARKE 1866
Carthage - Tunisia MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Carthage - MRE MRE CLARKE 1880
Chatham 1971 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Chatham 1971 - MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
Chua Astro MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Chua Astro - MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
Corrego Alegre MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Corrego Alegre - MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
Czechoslovakia - Before 1993 MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
D73 Portugal MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
C 10 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Dabola MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Deception Island - Antartica MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
DHDN-1 BURSA BESSEL DHDN
DHDN BURSA BESSEL DHDN
Djakarta MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Djakarta - MRE MRE BESSEL 1841
DLx Portugal MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Dos 1968 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Easter Island 1967 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
ED87 BURSA INTERNATIONAL
ETRS89 BURSA WGS84
Eur. 1950 - Cyprus MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - Egypt MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - Greece MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - Iran MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur 1950 - Iraq Israel Jordan etc. MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - Malta MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 MRE (Cyprus) MRE INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 MRE (Egypt) MRE INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 MRE (Iran) MRE INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 MRE (UK/Ireland) MRE INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 MRE (UK Only) MRE INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 MRE (Western) MRE INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - Norway/Finland MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - Port./Spain MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - Sardinia MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - Sicily MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - Tunisia MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - UK/Ireland MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - UK Only MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Eur. 1950 - W. Europe MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
European 1950 - Danish sector of
the North Sea
BURSA INTERNATIONAL
European 1950 - Mean MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
European 1979 - Mean MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Fahud MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Fort Thomas 1955 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Gandajika 1970 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
GD49 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
GDA94 BURSA GRS80
Geodetic Datum 1949 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide C 11
Version 4.0
Geodetic Datum 1949 - MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
GGRS 87 MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Graciosa Base SW 1948 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
GRS80 Euref BURSA GRS80
Guam 1963 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Guam 1963 - MRE MRE CLARKE 1866
Gunung Segara - Kalimantan
Indonesia
MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Gux 1 Astro MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Herat North - Afghanistan MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Hjorsey 1955 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Hjorsey 1955 - MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
Hong Kong 1963 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Hu-tzu-shan MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Indian 1954 MOLODENSKY EVEREST 1830
Indian 1954 Thailand MOLODENSKY EVEREST 1830
Indian 1960 - Vietnam MOLODENSKY EVEREST 1830
Indian 1960 - Con Son Island MOLODENSKY EVEREST 1830
Indian 1975 - Thailand MOLODENSKY EVEREST 1830
Indian - Bangladesh MOLODENSKY EVEREST 1830
Indian - India Nepal MOLODENSKY EVEREST 1956
Indian MRE - Thailand/Vietnam MRE EVEREST 1830
Indian - Pakistan MOLODENSKY EVEREST
PAKISTAN
Indonesian 1974 MOLODENSKY INDONESIAN 1974
Ireland 1965 MOLODENSKY MODIFIED AIRY
Ireland 1965 - MRE MRE MODIFIED AIRY
Ireland Datum 1975 MOLODENSKY AIRY 1830
Ireland Datum 1975 BURSA AIRY 1830
Ists 061 Astro 1968 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Ists 073 Astro 1969 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
ITRF 94 BURSA GRS80
Johnston Island 1961 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Kalianpur MOLODENSKY EVEREST 1830
Kandawala MOLODENSKY EVEREST 1830
Kandawala - MRE MRE EVEREST 1830
Kerguelen Island 1949 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Kertau 1948 MOLODENSKY EVEREST 1948
Kertau 1948 - MRE MRE EVEREST 1948
Krassovski - 1942 BURSA KRASSOVSKY
Kusaie Astro 1951 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
C 12 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
L.C. 5 Astro 1961 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Leigon MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Liberia 1964 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Liberia 1964 - MRE MRE CLARKE 1880
Luzon Datum BURSA CLARKE 1866
Luzon - Mindanao Isl. MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Luzon - Philippines MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Luzon MRE - Phillipines MRE CLARKE 1866
Mahe 1971 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Marco Astro MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Massawa - Eritrea MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Merchich - Morocco MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Merchich MRE - Morocco MRE CLARKE 1880
MGI Austria BURSA BESSEL 1841
MGI BURSA BESSEL 1841
Midway Astro 1961 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Minna - Cameroon MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Minna - Nigeria MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Minna MRE - Nigeria MRE CLARKE 1880
Monte Mario MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Montserrat Isl. Astro 1958 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
M'Poraloka MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
MRT (Everest Modified) BURSA EVEREST 1948
NAD83 Alabama - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Arizona - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Colorado - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Florida - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Idaho/Montana (East) -
HARN
HARN GRS80
NAD83 Idaho/Montana (West) -
HARN
HARN GRS80
NAD83 Kentucky - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Louisiana - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Maine - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Maryland/Delaware - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 MICHIGAN - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Mississippi - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Nebraska - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 New England - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 New Mexico - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Northern California - HARN HARN GRS80
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide C 13
Version 4.0
NAD83 Oklahoma - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Puerto Rico/Virgin Islands -
HARN
HARN GRS80
NAD83 Southern California - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Tennessee - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Texas (East) - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Texas (West) - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Virginia - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Washington/Oregon - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Wisconsin - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD83 Wyoming - HARN HARN GRS80
NAD 1927 - Alaska MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Alaska - MRE MRE CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Aleutian Islands MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Bahamas MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Canada - Mean MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Canada - MRE MRE CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Canada NTV2 CANTRANS CLARKE 1880
NAD 1927 - Canada - Alb/BC MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Canada - Eastern MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Canada - Man/Ont MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Canada - NW/Sas. MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Canada - Yukon MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Canal Zone MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Caribbean MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Carribean - MRE MRE CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Cent. America - MRE MRE CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Cuba MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - East Cent. America MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Eastern US MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - East of 180W -
Aleutians
MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Greenland MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Hawaii MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Mexico MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 (Molodensky CONUS) MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 (MRE CONUS) MRE CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 (NADCON CONUS) NADCON CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 (NADCON PRVI) NADCON CLARKE 1866
NAD27 Old Hawaiian - Hawaii MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD27 Old Hawaiian - Kauai MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
C 14 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
NAD27 Old Hawaiian - Maui MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD27 Old Hawaiian - Mean MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD27 Old Hawaiian - MRE MRE CLARKE 1866
NAD27 Old Hawaiian - Oahu MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - San Salvador Isl. MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - Western US MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - West of 180W -
Aleutians
MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
NAD 1927 - West Cent. America MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Nahrwan - Masirah Island MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Nahran MRE MRE CLARKE 1880
Nahrwan - U. Arab Emer. MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Nahrwan - Saudi Arabia MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Naparima BWI MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Naval Weapons Laboratory BURSA NWL 9D
Netherlands MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Nord Sahara 1959 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880 IGN
North American Datum 1983 MOLODENSKY GRS80
NTF France (Greenwich Meridian) MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880 IGN
NTF France (Paris Meridian) MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
NTF France (Paris Meridian)-
Bursa/Wolf
BURSA CLARKE 1880 IGN
Observatorio 1939 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Old Egyptian 1907 - Egypt MOLODENSKY HELMERT 1906
Old Egyptian 1907 MRE MRE HELMERT 1906
Old Hawaiian - Hawaii MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Old Hawaiian - Kauai MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Old Hawaiian - Maui MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Old Hawaiian - Mean MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Old Hawaiian - MRE MRE CLARKE 1866
Old Hawaiian - Oahu MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Oman MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Oman MRE CLARKE 1880
Ord. Surv. 1936 - England MOLODENSKY AIRY 1830
Ord. Surv. 1936 - England & Wales MOLODENSKY AIRY 1830
Ord. Surv. 1936 - Scotland-Shetland MOLODENSKY AIRY 1830
Ord. Surv. 1936 - Wales MOLODENSKY AIRY 1830
Ord. Surv. of GB - MRE MRE AIRY 1830
Ord. Surv. of Gr. Br. 1936 MOLODENSKY AIRY 1830
Pico De Las Nieves MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Pitcairn Astro 1967 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide C 15
Version 4.0
Point 58 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Pointe Noire 1948 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Porto Santo 1936 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Potsdam BURSA BESSEL 1841
Prov. S.A. 1956 - Bolivia MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Prov. S.A. 1956 - Colombia MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Prov. S.A. 1956 - Ecuador MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Prov. S.A. 1956 - Guyana MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Prov. S.A. 1956 - MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
Prov. S.A. 1956 - Mean MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Prov. S.A. 1956 - N. Chile MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Prov. S.A. 1956 - Peru MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Prov. S.A. 1956 - S. Chile MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Prov. S.A. 1956 - Venez. MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Prov. So. Chilean 1963 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Puerto Rico MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1866
Puerto Rico - MRE MRE CLARKE 1866
Pulkovo 1942 - Hungary MOLODENSKY KRASSOVSKY
Pulkovo 1942 - Hungary
(Bursa/Wolf)
BURSA KRASSOVSKY
Qatar National MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Qatar National 1995 BURSA HAYFORD
Qatar National MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL
Qornoq MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
RD/NAP BURSA BESSEL 1841
Reunion MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Rome 1940 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
RT90 BURSA BESSEL RT90
Santo (DOS) 1965 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Sao Braz MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Sapper Hill 1943 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Schwarzeck MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
NAMIBIA
Selvagem Grande 1938 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
So. Amer. 1969 - Argentina MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Baltra MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Bolivia MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Brazil MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Chile MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
C 16 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Colombia MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Ecuador MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Guyana MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Mean MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - MRE MRE SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Paraguay MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Peru MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Trinidad MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
So. Amer. 1969 - Venezuela MOLODENSKY SOUTH AMERICAN
1969
South Asia MOLODENSKY MOD FISCHER 1966
Southeast Base MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Southwest Base MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Southwest Base MRE INTERNATIONAL
Switzerland - CH1903 BURSA BESSEL 1841
System 42/83 BURSA KRASSOVSKY
System 42/83 Germany BURSA KRASSOVSKY
Tananarive Observatory 1925 -
Madagascar
MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Timbalai 1948 MOLODENSKY EVEREST BRUNEI
Timbalai 1948 - MRE MRE EVEREST BRUNEI
TM65 MOLODENSKY AIRY 1849
Tokyo - Japan MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Tokyo - Korea MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Tokyo - Mean MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Tokyo - MRE MRE BESSEL 1841
Tokyo - Okinawa MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Tokyo - South Korea MOLODENSKY BESSEL 1841
Tristan Astro 1968 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Vientiane 1982 MOLODENSKY KRASSOVSKY
Vientiane 1993 MOLODENSKY KRASSOVSKY
Viti Levu 1916 MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Voirol 1960 - Algeria MOLODENSKY CLARKE 1880
Wake-Eniwetok 1960 MOLODENSKY HOUGH
Wake Eniwetok 1960 - MRE MRE HOUGH
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide C 17
Version 4.0
Wake Island Astro 1952 MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
WGS 1972 MOLODENSKY WGS72
WGS 1972 (7 Parameter) BURSA WGS72
WGS 1984 MOLODENSKY WGS84
Yacare - Uruguay MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Zanderij MOLODENSKY INTERNATIONAL
Zanderij - MRE MRE INTERNATIONAL

C 18 ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide Index i
Version 4.0
Index
3
3D Map View window, about 3-19, 4-29, 4-31
A
Adding
filters 5-9
Logical Networks 4-3
Logical nodes 4-3
Logical Nodes 4-3
AIRCOM, email 1-2
Algorithms, data needed 2-17
All Cell Info Display Properties dialog box, about
4-15, 4-16
Antennas
diagrams A-36
editing 4-23
example A-37
file format A-37
site visibility 4-23
Antennas window, about 3-4
Arrays
file format A-21
Arrays, saving 4-24
Attachments, adding 5-33
Australian Map Grid 2-7
B
Backdrops A-4
Base strings, setting 5-20
Belgiam Lambert Conformation 2-7
BTS window, about 3-8
Building heights, editing 5-29
C
Calculations, troubleshooting 2-17
Candidates
adding 5-4
breaking 5-7
displaying 5-6
removing 5-7
Carriers
file format A-34, A-37, A-41
Carriers, displaying 4-17
Cell equipment
photographs 5-33
Cell Equipment window, about 3-7
Cells
deleting 4-5, 6-2
layers 6-14
naming 5-20
Changing, projects 2-3
Clutter, editing 4-10, 5-27
Colour codes, displaying 4-16
Colours
file format A-48
Conversion systems 2-7
Converters 5-21
Coordinates, setting 2-10
Copying, projects 2-18
D
Data
minimum needed 2-17
ordering 4-18
viewing 4-10, 4-18
Databases
about 6-1
Datums
creating 2-8
editing 2-8
Defaults
identifiers 5-20
minimum 2-17
prediction radius 6-10
Deleting
items from wastebasket 3-22, 3-23
items on map 4-5
restoring deleted items 3-22, 3-23
Displaying
cross-sections 4-32
data 3-19, 4-10, 4-29, 4-31, 6-1
data on maps 4-18
database contents 6-1
line of sight visibility 4-22
network items 4-12
Distance, setting units 2-12, 3-2
Distribution nodes
adding 4-5
connecting to 2-15
deleting 4-5
moving 4-6
E
Earth radius 2-12, 3-2
Editing
globally 6-24
project information 2-3
EiRP 6-19
Index ii ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
Ellipsoids
creating 2-7
editing 2-7
specifying 2-5
Emailing product support 1-2
ENTERPRISE, file formats A-15
Equipment
adding 6-30
photographs 5-33
storing 6-30
ERP 6-19
Examples
antennas A-37
expressions 4-25
flags 5-32
interference table file A-26
Exporting, project data 2-19
Expressions 4-25
F
Favourites
accessing 4-24
saving 4-24
Feeders window, about 3-6
Field strength, setting units 2-12, 3-2
File formats A-1, A-15, A-20
Files
attaching to sites 5-33
converting 5-21
Filters
about 5-9
adding 5-9
deleting 5-12
editing 5-12
polygons as 5-22
using 5-9
Flags
about 5-31
creating 5-32
examples 5-32
file format A-46
Frequency
displaying 4-17
hopping 6-15
G
Global changes 2-12, 3-2, 6-24
Global Editor, using 6-24
GPS, using 5-8
H
Height Profile window, about 4-32
Height, data 5-27, 5-29
Hopping 6-15
I
Identifiers, setting defaults 5-20
Importing, vectors 5-25
index.txt files A-1
Interference
array file formats A-21
tables A-25
Interference tables
file formats A-25
K
Key, displaying 4-34
L
Lambert Conformal Conic 2-7
Laptops, synchronising projects 2-18
Licence Manager, using 3-21
Licensing, troubleshooting 3-21
Line data, changing display 4-14
Line of sight
displaying 4-22
plots 4-32
Links
adding 4-6
deleting 4-6
flags 5-32
naming 5-20
Locations, finding on map 4-25
Logical Connection Viewer
Routes 4-39
Traffic 4-37
Logical Networks
about 4-2
adding 4-3
adding nodes 4-3
Logical nodes, adding 4-3
M
Map data
format A-1
projections 2-5, 2-6, 2-7
specifying 2-5
Map Information window, about 3-18, 4-28
Map View window, about 3-18, 4-1, 4-28
Maps
changing display 4-18
displaying data 4-18
favourites 4-24
line of sight visibility 4-22
printing 4-26, 4-30
redrawing 4-18, 4-20
repositioning 4-20, 4-30
saving views 4-24
scanned A-4
searching 4-25
ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide Index iii
Version 4.0
selecting items 4-18
size 2-10
troubleshooting 4-10
viewing 3-19, 4-1, 4-24, 4-29
zooming 4-20
Merging, synchronisation changes 2-23
Message Log window, about 3-20
Message, Already in Use by Another User 6-3
Messages, about 3-20
Microwave links, adding 4-6
Minimum data needed 2-17
Modify Project dialog box 2-3
Moving, items on map 4-6
N
NAD27 2-7
Naming, setting defaults 5-20
Naming, troubleshooting 3-22
Neighbours
file format A-27, A-35, A-42
Networks
connections 4-6, 5-32
displaying items 4-12
editing items 6-24
settings 2-12, 3-2
Nominals
adding 5-4
displaying 5-6
overlapping search areas 5-7
O
Ordering map data 4-18
P
PA Output 6-19
Partial loading 2-10, 2-11
Photographs
file format A-4
Photographs, using 5-33
PlaNet file formats A-37, A-41, A-42, A-43
Poland Krasovsky 2-7
Polygons
as filters 5-22
changing display 4-14
creating 5-22, 5-28
examples 5-13
Population
vector file format A-9
Predictions
file format A-27
Predictions, radius 6-10
Preferences dialog box, about 2-12, 3-2
Printing
Contact details 6-1, 6-56-6, 6-9, 6-24, 6-26, 6-
36
maps 4-26, 4-30
Product support 1-2
Projections
about 2-6
editing 2-7
specifying 2-5
Projects
copying 2-18
editing 2-3
loading subsets 2-10, 2-11
synchronising 2-18
Properties
about 6-4
candidates 5-4, 5-7
definition 6-4
details 3-12
export A-20
file format A-20
import A-20
naming 5-20
nominals 5-4
search area 4-8
R
Radiated power, setting 6-19
Radius
displaying 4-8, 4-22
earth 2-12, 3-2
Redrawing maps 4-20
Refreshing maps 4-20
Regions, loading 2-10, 2-11
Remote working 2-18
Repeaters
deleting 4-5, 6-2
editing 6-8
moving 4-6
naming 5-20
Repositioning maps 4-20, 4-30
Resolution
changing 4-10
line of sight 4-22
Restoring, deleted items 3-23
S
Saving, map views 4-24
Scanned maps A-4
Search areas 4-8, 5-4, 5-7
Searching
expressions for 4-25
maps 4-25
tree pane 3-12
Settings, changing 2-12, 3-2
Site Database window, about 3-9
Site Templates, creating 5-2
Sites
adding 6-3
attaching files 5-33
changing globally 6-24
Index iv ENTERPRISE User Reference Guide
Version 4.0
definition 6-4
deleting 4-5, 6-2
displaying 3-9, 3-12, 4-10, 4-22
filters 5-9
finding on map 4-25
flagging status 5-31
moving 4-6
naming 5-20
photographs 5-33
plotting line of sight 4-32
search area 4-8
selecting 3-9, 4-25
status 5-31
troubleshooting 6-3
viewing 4-10, 4-22
visibility 4-22, 4-23
State Plane NAD 2-7
Status flags
about 5-31
creating 5-32
examples 5-32
file format A-46
Storing data 6-1
Support, product 1-2
Synchronisation
about 2-18
dialog box 2-22
merging changes 2-23
T
Templates, site 5-2
Terrain
height 5-27, A-2A-3
viewing cross-section 4-32
Text, finding on map 4-25
to create a site template 5-2
Toolbars
3D Map View 3-20
ENTERPRISE 3-2
Height Profile 4-33
main 3-2
Map View 3-17
Traffic
file formats A-29
Traffic, rasters 4-24
Transfer file 2-19, 2-21
Transverse Mercator 2-7
Troubleshooting
apply and commit 6-39
coordinates 2-10
GPS 5-8
licensing 3-21
naming items 3-22
resolution 4-10
selecting items 4-18
sites 6-3
vectors 5-26
U
Units, setting 2-12, 3-2
UTM 2-5, 2-7
V
Vector Editor, about 5-24
Vectors
building A-11
changing display 4-14
file formats A-7
importing 5-25
troubleshooting 5-26
Viewing, data 4-1
Visibility, of sites 4-22
W
Warnings 3-20
Wastebasket
about 3-22
deleting items in 3-23
example 6-3
Working remotely 2-18
Z
Zoom 4-20, 4-30

You might also like